FR-F700P Catalog
INVERTER
Model
FR-F700P
Evolved energy-saving premium inverter.
PREMIUM INVERTER F700P
The Next-Generation "F700P Inverter for Fans and Pumps" for Reducing CO2 Emissions
The "F700P inverter for fans and pumps"
can drive both general-purpose motors
(3-phase induction motors) and IPM
motors. The F700P could be the
solution to your energy saving needs.
To Save More Energy — the MM-EFS Series is Now Available
(1) IE4-equivalent efficiency level
*As of October 2012
High
IEC 60034-30
Efficiency class
Efficiency
●A high-efficiency IPM motor "MM-EF series"
is equivalent to IE3 (premium efficiency).
A premium high-efficiency IPM motor
"MM-EFS series" provides even better
efficiency that is equivalent to IE4 (super
premium efficiency), the highest efficiency
class*.
gy
Enering
sav
Inverters for Dramatic Energy Saving
●Optimum excitation control continuously adjusts the excitation
current to an optimum level to provide the highest motor
efficiency, and that leads to substantial energy savings. (Refer to
page 47 for the details.)
This means that controlling the rotation speed to adjust the air volume
can lead to energy savings.
[Example of blower operation characteristic]
At 10% motor load torque, for example, the motor efficiency under Optimum
excitation control is about 15% higher than the motor efficiency under
conventional V/F control.
*1
Damper control
Optimum excitation control
100
80
Motor efficiency (%)
Consumed power (%)
120
100
General-purpose motor
driven with inverter
60
High-performance
energy-saving
40 motor driven with inverter
Premium high-efficiency
IPM motor driven with inverter
20
0
40
60
80
Air volume (%)
*1: Rated motor output is 100%.
Low
(2) Energy saving with Optimum
excitation control (General-purpose motors)
●The consumed power of a variable-torque load, such as
fans, pumps, and blowers, is proportional to the cube of its
rotation speed.
IE3 (premium efficiency)
High-efficiency IPM
(MM-EF)
0
20
40
60
80
[Comparison of Mitsubishi products]
[Comparison of efficiency]
Total efficiency (%)
Premium high-efficiency IPM
motor driven with inverter
•No current flows to the rotor (secondary side), and no secondary copper
loss is generated.
•Magnetic flux is generated with permanent magnets, and less motor current is required.
•Embedded magnets provide reluctance torque*2, and the reluctance torque
can be applied.
95
General-purpose motor
85
100% loss (stator side)
75
65
General-purpose motor
driven with inverter
0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5
11
15 18.5 22
●What is an IPM motor?
An IPM motor is a synchronous
motor with strong permanent
magnets embedded in its rotor.
30
37
45
55
Other
Other
MM-EF
IPM motor (synchronous motor)
Stator coil
(three-phase coil)
Permanent magnet
S
Permanent
magnets
N
N
S
S
N
S
Now…
Drive unit
Spare inverters for both
Inverter
General-purpose motor (induction motor)
Stator core
Shaft
N
*Example of
6-pole motor
Rotor conductor
(copper or aluminum)
*2: Reluctance torque
Reluctance torque occurs due to magnetic imbalance on the rotor.
• Parameter
39
• Protective
functions
64
• Options and
66
peripheral devices
Future
• Compatible
86
• IPM motor
92
motor
One spare inverter
control
Drive unit
and
• Difference
compatibility with
S
Rotor core
• Operation panel
• Parameter unit 27
• FR Configurator
selection
MM-EFS
Shaft
12
IM and IPM driven
by one inverter
Iron loss
Primary copper 40%
loss
Other
Stator coil
Stator core (three-phase coil)
N
S
• Outline
IPM parameter initialization
Premium inverter
Premium high-efficiency
IPM motor
60%
8
on
• Precaution
selection and operation
80
on
• Precautions
peripheral device
Motor structure (section view)
N
IPM motor (MM-EFS)
Primary copper
loss
SF-JR
[Comparison of Mitsubishi products]
Stator coil
Stator core
Rotor core
Inverter
Iron loss
Secondary copper
loss (rotor side)
High-performance energy-saving
motor driven with inverter
Motor capacity (kW)
1
Before
High-efficiency
IPM motor
Primary copper
High-efficiency IPM motor
driven with inverter
80
M
IM&IP
Never drive an IPM motor in the IM drive setting.
●One spare F700P inverter is enough for the two types of motors (IM and IPM);
the number of required spare inverters is reduced by half.
Iron loss
specs
MM-EFS371M4
●The IM driving setting can be switched to IPM driving setting by only one setting
"12" (MM-EFS) in the parameter
. (Refer to page 92 for details.)
* Example of 22kW motors
90
70
[ Comparison of motor losses ]
• Standard
details
(1) The F700P series inverter can drive both a general-purpose motor (IM) and an IPM motor (IPM).
●Why is an IPM motor more efficient?
7
• Parameter list 31
Driving IM and IPM Brings So Many Benefits
100
(3) Energy saving with IPM motors
100
●The frame number is the same (same size) as the
Mitsubishi general-purpose motors (4-pole SF-JR/SF-HR
series). Replacement is easy as the installation sizes are
compatible. (55kW or lower)
20
Motor load torque (%)
•The IPM motors that have permanent magnets embedded in their rotors
are even more efficient than the high-performance energy-saving motors.
(2) Smooth replacement from a general-purpose motor (with the same installation size)
SF-JR 3.7kW
V/F control
100
[Comparison of Mitsubishi products]
●High efficiency achieved with IPM motors
Below the class
Same size
40
examples
• Terminal connection
diagrams
24
• Terminal specs
Standard three-phase
motor (SF-JR)
*: The details of IE4 can be found in IEC 60034-31.
More energy saving
• Connection
dimensions
High-performance energysaving motor (SF-HR)
80
60
1
IPM motor
Premium high-efficiency
IPM (MM-EFS)
IE2 (high efficiency)
• Features
Efficiency of Mitsubishi motors
General-purpose motor
IE4
(super premium efficiency)*
IE1 (standard efficiency)
(1) Energy saving with speed control
ium
Prem ciency
fi
f
high-e motor
IPM
Rotor core
FR-F500 (L) series
(2) Simple and reliable transition from IM to IPM
●There is no need to replace the whole system at once;
replace the inverters first, then replace the motors.
When the budget is limited, equipment investment can be
made over several stages.
and
• Price
delivery time
Equipment Investment in Stages
96
1st Stage
First, replace
inverters.
Renewal
completed!
• Warranty
• Global FA centers 97
2nd Stage
Next, replace
motors.
2
PREMIUM INVERTER F700P
Decelerates during
instantaneous power failure
(operation continued)
Coasts during
instantaneous
power failure
voltage (0 to 5V / 0 to 10V) and current (4 to 20mA)
(3) Complete I/O terminals come standard
●Contact input (12 terminals), analog input (3 terminals), open
collector output (5 terminals), relay output (2 terminals), analog
output, and pulse train output come standard. Various functions
can be assigned to these terminals.
●Voltage and current are selectable for analog input.
●ON/OFF status of the signals inputted to or outputted from the
I/O terminals can be displayed on the operation panel.
(4) Automatic acceleration/deceleration time switchover
Power failure time
deceleration-to-stop function
(7) Regeneration avoidance function
Time
Slope set Slope set
by Pr.7
by Pr.44
Acceleration time
Slope set Slope set
by Pr.44 by Pr.8
(Pr.45)
Deceleration time
●Vibration caused by mechanical resonance can be suppressed.
●Simple magnetic flux vector control enables the high torque*2
generation in a low-speed operation range.
This function is useful for a pump application, which requires
large starting torque. (Available with general-purpose motors)
*2: Up to 120% torque at 3Hz is generatable in combination with the slip compensation function.
(5) Password function
(10) Energy saving effect checked at a glance
●Parameter writing/reading can be restricted
with a 4-digit password.
This function is useful to prevent parameter
values from being rewritten by misoperation.
●Being RoHS compliant, the FR-700P series inverters are friendly
to people and the environment.
*1: Leakage current is higher when the EMC filter is enabled.
*2: The EMC filter is always enabled for the 200V 0.75K and 1.5K inverters of which leakage current is
generally low. (No connector is provided for these models.)
The common mode choke installed at the input side of the 55K- or lower-capacity inverter is always
enabled and unaffected by the ON/OFF status of the EMC filter connector.
*2: Refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines for the required specification.
DC reactor
Standard (built-in)
Standard (built-in)
Option (sold separately)
Standard (built-in) Option (sold separately) Standard (accessory)
●Selection of small frames
●Wide line-up of safety contactors
Features
(1) Operation panel equipped with the setting dial
(3) Easy setting from personal computer with FR Configurator
●Operation can be
easily performed with
the popular
Mitsubishi setting dial.
●Inverter operations from start-up to maintenance are easily
performed.
●Parameter settings can be printed or saved in a file.
A file containing the FR-F700
parameter settings can be
exported to an FR-F700P
series inverter.
●The conversion function
allows parameter copy from
an FR-F500 inverter to
FR-F700P.
Parameter list
(3) Harmonic current suppression
●Harmonic current may adversely affect the power supply. To suppress
such harmonic current, the power-factor-improving compact AC
reactor (FR-HAL) and the DC reactor (FR-HEL) are available. (A DC
reactor is provided for the 75K or higher as standard.)
Supporting More Network Protocols
(1) RS-485 terminal block equipped as standard
●By attaching the EMC filter connector to the ON or OFF position,
the built-in EMC filter can be set enabled/disabled*1*2. When it is
enabled, the inverter conforms to the EMC Directive
(EN61800-3/2nd Environment Category C3*3) by itself.
3
Easy
●Simple parameter setting (Pr.79 Operation mode selection)
●Communication setting for Mitsubishi HMI (GOT)
●Rated frequency change (60Hz → 50Hz)
●Unit change in acceleration/deceleration time setting (0.1s → 0.01s)
rced s
e
Reinfo
easur
EMI m
(2) EMI suppression (equipped with the EMC filter)
Introducing the Mitsubishi
magnetic contactor
Easy Operation
(2) Automatic parameter setting specific to the application
(1) Compliance with the Restriction of the Use of
Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and
Electronic Equipment (RoHS Directive) in Europe
Capacitive filter Common mode choke
Removable terminal block
●The energy saving effect can be checked on the energy saving monitor.
●The measured output power amount can be output in pulses.
Environmentally Friendly
55K or lower
75K or higher
*3: A warning is output when any of the main circuit capacitor, control circuit capacitor, inrush current limit
circuit, and cooling fan reaches its output level.
(8) Mechanical resonance suppression (speed smoothing)
(9) Simple magnetic flux vector control
Pr.147
setting
Cooling Fan
●The operation frequency is automatically increased to prevent
the regenerative overvoltage fault from occurring. This function is
useful when a load is forcibly rotated by another fan in the duct.
(Available with general-purpose motors)
Set frequency
Output
frequency (Hz)
●A frequency where the
acceleration/deceleration time
is changed can be pre-set; an
external switch is not required
to switch the time setting.
This function is especially
useful for an operation that
requires high torque in a
low speed operation.
Automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure function
●The degree of deterioration of the main circuit capacitor, control
circuit capacitor, and inrush current limit circuit can be
diagnosed on the monitor.
●Using the self-diagnosis function, the part life warning*3 can be
output. With these warnings, the self-diagnosis function prevents
troubles from occurring.
●Detachable operation panel
●Parameter copy with operation panel
●Removable terminal blocks
●Easy wiring with comb-shaped
wiring cover
●Replaceable cooling fan
Standard
specs
(2) The leading-edge life diagnosis function
(4) Easier work
Operation panel
Parameter unit
FR Configurator
●To save energy in low-speed operation: PID output shutoff (sleep) function
●To shorten the start-up time of PID control: PID automatic switchover function
●For air conditioning applications: Forward/reverse rotation switching by external signals
●To use various types of detectors: PID set point and measured value outputs in
*1: The inverter may trip and coast the motor under some load conditions.
*2: Output current: 80% of the inverter rating.
Outline
dimensions
During operations of fans and blowers, the operation is continued at an
instantaneous power failure without the motor coasting*1.
*1: Surrounding air temperature: Annual average of 40ºC (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist,
dust and dirt). The design life is a calculated value and is not a guaranteed product life.
Terminal connection
diagrams
Terminal specs
●Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function.
Parameter
list
(2) Full-scale PID function
Pr.8
Deceleration time
●A fault can be initiated by setting a parameter.
This function is useful to check how the system operates at
a fault.
●The maintenance timer output function notifies the user about
the maintenance time of peripheral devices.
AC reactor (FR-HAL)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
●The F700P series inverters (55K or lower) are equipped with built-in
capacitive filters and common mode chokes. By installing only an
optional DC reactor (FR-HEL), they can conform to the Architectural
Standard Specifications (Electric Installation) and Architectural
Standard Specifications (Machinery Installation) (year 2009) issued by
the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism of Japan.
●Low level load (auxiliary contact) supported
●Conformed to many international standards
Refer to page 78
for the selection.
●A RS-485 terminal block is equipped separately from the PU
connector. Multi-drop connection can be easily performed with
separate input and output terminals.
●The newly added "Multi-command
RS-485
Mode" of Mitsubishi inverter protocol terminal
block
cuts down the data processing time
of the inverter from 1/3 to 1/4.
●The F700P inverters support Modbus-RTU
(binary) protocol in addition to the
conventional Mitsubishi inverter protocol.
●The 32-bit cumulative power monitor
enables monitoring of a large cumulative
power amount without letting it overflow.
y
sibilit
n
e
t
x
E
(2) Main international network protocols supported
●LONWORKS®, CC-Link Ver.1.1, Ver.2.0, CC-Link IE Field,
DeviceNet™, PROFIBUS-DP, FL Remote are supported through
communication options.
PLC
Power supply
module CPU Master station
Inverter
Inverter
Max. 42 units
connectable
(when connecting
only inverters)
FR-A7NC
Terminating
resistor
CC-Link
CC-Link Network
dedicated cable
Parameter
descriptions
Time
Pr.7
Acceleration time
●The service life of the cooling fans is now 10
The service
life can be further extended by ON/OFF control of the cooling fan.
●Capacitors with a design life of 10 years*1*2 are adapted. (Using a
surrounding air temperature of 105ºC for 5000 hours). With these
capacitors, the service life of the inverter is further extended.)
Protective
functions
(Available with general-purpose
motors)
After an instantaneous power failure, the operation is re-startable from the
coasting motor speed.
Even if the rotation direction has been forcibly reversed, the operation can be
smoothly restarted in the original direction.
(3) Hands-free maintenance
years*1.
Motors
Set
frequency
Base
frequency
(1) Longer life parts
Options
●Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function / flying
start function.
Precautions
(6) Keep running during instantaneous power failure
●Variable torque loads such
as fans and blowers can be
accelerated/decelerated in
a short period of time.
FR-A7NC
Terminating
resistor
IPM motor
control
(1) Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration pattern
&
Easy -free
e
l
b
trou
Connection
examples
Long Life and Simple Maintenance
Compatibility
Price
Bestation
bin
Com
Warranty / Inquiry
Various Functions for Fans and Pumps
4
PREMIUM INVERTER F700P
CO2
LINE UP
Features
How Much CO2 Emission Is Reduced?
Less
The longer the operating period with medium air volume is, the higher energy saving effect obtained with an inverter.
●Inverter
[Units to drive]
[Units to drive]
[Units to drive]
●Water-cooling pump
3.7kW × 1 unit
●Fans for the cooling tower
1.5kW × 1 unit
●Freezer
11kW × 3 unit
5.5kW × 2 unit
3.7kW × 1 unit
3.0kW × 1 unit
●Ventilator
0.75kW × 3 unit
1.5kW × 1 unit
2.2kW × 3 unit
●Air conditioner
15kW × 1 unit
18.5kW × 1 unit
30kW × 2 unit
●Fans for air conditioning
5.5kW × 10 unit
7.5kW × 10 unit
3.7kW × 100 unit
Water volume (%)
100
Power supply
specification
Air volume (%)
80
60
50
40
25
Operation
patterns
Time
Spring Summer
Fall
Winter
6
8760 hours/year
●With commercial power supply
Approx. 0.15 million kWh
Approx. 2.17 million yen
8
10
18
2021
0
6
9
12
15
18
21
5110 hours/year
●With general-purpose motor ●With IPM motor
●With general-purpose motor ●With IPM motor
Approx. 0.22 million kWh
Approx. 3.02 million yen
Inverter capacity
Represents
the capacity (kW).
Connection
examples
0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 560
FR-F720P-K
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FR-F740P-K
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●: Available –: Not available
24
5475 hours/year
Approx. 0.25 million kWh
Approx. 3.44 million yen
Inverter
model
Symbol
0.75K to 560K
Time
Time
0
200V class
400V class
Precautions
•Never drive an IPM motor in the IM drive setting.
•Use the same IPM motor capacity as the inverter capacity.
•For IPM motor, use an MM-EFS or MM-EF series motor.
Please contact us regarding a combination with
other manufacturer's IPM motor.
100
80
50
2
4
Three-phase
200V
Three-phase
400V
Air volume (%)
75
Symbol Voltage class
Inverter + IPM motor
(MM-EFS)
Standard
specs
Inverter + IPM motor
(MM-EFS)
Approx. 2.39 million kWh
Approx. 33.42 million yen
The 400V class is approved for
the shipping classification of Class NK and CCS.
Compatible with UL, cUL, EC Directives
(CE marking)
A noise filter (shown on page 79) is separately required. *IPM motors are not compatible with the above
*Please contact us for the detailed approved condition. regulations and directives.
Approx. 2.1 million kWh
Approx. 29.43 million yen
●With inverter
Parameter
descriptions
Approx. 0.14 million kWh
Approx. 1.9 million yen
●Premium high-efficiency IPM motor
0.42 million yen
Approx. 0.019 million kWh
10.7 tons
Approx. 0.03 million kWh
16.7 tons
Approx.
3.99 million yen
●Annual CO2 emission reduction
Symbol Output Symbol Output
Approx. 0.28 million kWh
The IPM energy savings simulation file calculates the energy saving effect
and CO2 reduction rate achieved by replacing commercial power supply
(damper/valve control) operation with IPM motor operation by inverter. This
file requires inputs of motor capacity, quantity, air volume, operating time, etc.
●FR Configurator (Option) (FR-SW3-SETUP-WE)
Support tool for the inverter operations from start-up to maintenance.
Symbol Rated speed*1
15kW
18.5kW
22kW
30kW
37kW
45kW
55kW
15K
18K
22K
30K
37K
45K
55K
Symbol Voltage class
7
15
22
37
55
75
11K
0.75kW
1.5kW
2.2kW
3.7kW
5.5kW
7.5kW
11kW
Rated output (kW)
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
Motor model
7
15
22
37
55
75
11K
15K
18K
22K
30K
37K
45K
158 tons
Your best assistant — Mitsubishi inverter software
●IPM energy savings simulation file
Protective
functions
Approx.
●Annual CO2 emission reduction
M M - E F S 7 1M 4
Approx. 0.28 million kWh
200V class
MM-EFS1M
400V class
MM-EFS1M4
1M
None
4
1500r/min
200V
400V
Options
0.27 million yen
Approx. 0.03 million kWh
●Annual energy saving effect
*1: Also applicable to an application with the rated speed of 1800r/min.
Please contact your sales representative for a special specification such as long-axis type,
flange shape, water-proof outdoor type, and salt-proof type.
55
75
55K 75K
90
110
132
160
90K 110K 132K 160K
Motors
Approx.
●Annual CO2 emission reduction
●Annual energy saving effect
: Available
: To be released
: Not applicable
Precautions
•MM-EFS series IPM motors cannot be driven with commercial power supply.
•The total wiring length for an IPM motor should be 100m or less.
•Only one IPM motor can be connected to an inverter.
IPM motor
control
(differences in the amount and cost)
Approx. 0.019 million kWh
Compatibility
Price
●Annual energy saving effect
(Annual) energy
saving effect
produced by
replacing to IPM
motors driven
with inverters
●High-efficiency IPM motor
M M - E F 4 2 4
0.4kW
0.75kW
1.5kW
11K
15K
…
…
5
…
IPM energy savings simulation file
4
7
15
…
Symbol Output Symbol Output
11kW
15kW
110K
110kW
Outline
dimensions
Condition
Inverter + General-purpose
motor (SF-JR)
Terminal connection
diagrams
Terminal specs
Inverter + General-purpose
motor (SF-JR)
F R - F 7 2 0 P - 3.7K
Operation panel
Parameter unit
FR Configurator
Inverter + General-purpose
motor (SF-JR)
Air conditioning in a building
Parameter
list
Commercial power + General-purpose
supply (valve)
motor (SF-JR)
Air conditioning in a Mitsubishi plant
Precautions
Water-cooling pump for a showcase
Symbol Rated speed
2
1800r/min
Symbol Voltage class
None
4
200V
400V
Symbol Protective structure
None
P2
IP44
IP45
Precautions
•MM-EF series IPM motors cannot be driven with
commercial power supply.
•The total wiring length for an IPM motor should be
100m or less.
•Only one IPM motor can be connected to an inverter.
Warranty / Inquiry
(Conditions: The electricity cost is 14 yen/kWh. The CO2 emission is 1,000kWh 0.555ton - CO2 emission)
6
Connection example
Three-phase AC power supply
Use within the permissible power supply
specifications of the inverter.
(Refer to page 8)
Programmable
controller
Human machine interface
Inverter (FR-F700P)
Moulded case circuit
breaker (MCCB)
or earth leakage circuit
breaker (ELB), fuse
The life of the inverter is influenced by surrounding air
temperature. The surrounding air temperature should be as
low as possible within the permissible range. Especially when
mounting the inverter inside an enclosure, take cautions of the
surrounding air temperature. (Refer to page 10)
Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the inverter. The
control signal lines must be kept fully away from the main
circuit to protect them from noise. (Refer to page 24)
Refer to the Instruction Manual for the built-in EMC filter.
RS-485 terminal block
The inverter can be connected with a
computer such as a programmable
controller and with GOT (human
machine interface).
They support Mitsubishi inverter
protocol and Modbus-RTU (binary)
protocol.
The breaker must be selected carefully since
an inrush current flows in the inverter at
power on.
(Refer to page 78)
Magnetic contactor(MC)
Install the magnetic contactor to ensure safety.
Do not use this MC to frequently start and stop the
inverter.
Doing so will cause the inverter life to be shortened.
(Refer to page 78)
Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL)
Install reactors to suppress harmonics and to
improve the power factor. An AC reactor (FR-HAL)
(option) is required when installing the inverter near
a large power supply system (1000kVA or more).
The inverter may be damaged if you do not use
reactors.
Select the reactor according to the model.
For the 55K or lower, remove the jumpers across
terminals P/+ and P1 to connect to the DC reactor.
(Refer to page 69, 70)
EMC filter
(ferrite core)
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
AC reactor
(FR-HAL)
DC reactor
(FR-HEL)
EMC filter
(ferrite core)
(FR-BLF)
P/+ P1 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P/+ N/-
For the 75K or higher, a
DC reactor is supplied.
Always install the reactor.
IM connection
IPM connection
U V W
U VW
Earth
(Ground)
The 55K or lower has a built-in
common mode choke.
(Refer to page 77)
Install an EMC filter (ferrite
core) to reduce the
electromagnetic noise
generated from the inverter.
Effective in the range from
about 0.5MHz to 5MHz.
A wire should be wound four
turns at a maximum.
(Refer to page 77)
Contactor
Example) No-fuse
switch (DSN type)
Brake unit
(FR-BU2)
P/+ PR
P/+
High power factor
converter
(FR-HC2)
Power regeneration
common converter
(FR-CV*1)
Power regeneration
converter (MT-RC*2)
Power supply harmonics
can be greatly suppressed.
Install this as required.
(Refer to page 75)
Greater braking capability
is obtained.
Install this as required.
(Refer to page 74)
*1 Compatible with the 55K or lower.
*2 Compatible with the 75K or higher.
: Install these options as required.
Generalpurpose
motor
Earth
(Ground)
PR
Resistor unit
(FR-BR*1, MT-BR5*2)
The regeneration braking
capability of the inverter can be
exhibited fully.
Install this as required.
(Refer to page 72)
Devices connected
to the output
Earth
Do not install a power
factor correction capacitor,
(Ground)
surge suppressor or EMC filter (capacitor) on the
output side of the inverter.
When installing a moulded case circuit breaker on
the output side of the inverter, contact each
manufacturer for selection of the moulded case
circuit breaker.
Install a contactor in an
application where the IPM
motor is driven by the load
even at power-OFF of the
inverter. Do not open or
close the contactor while
the inverter is running
(outputting).
(Refer to page 81)
Dedicated IPM motor
(MM-EFS, MM-EF)
Use the specified motor.
IPM motors cannot be driven
by the commercial power
supply.
(Refer to page 88, 90)
Earth (Ground)
To prevent an electric shock, always earth
(ground) the motor and inverter.
CAUTION
· Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter output side. This will
cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor, and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are connected,
immediately remove them.
· Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication
devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize interference.
(Refer to Chapter 2 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
· Refer to the instruction manual of each option and peripheral devices for details of peripheral devices.
· An IPM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.
· An IPM motor is a motor with permanent magnets embedded. High-voltage is generated at motor terminals while the motor is
running even after the inverter power is turned OFF. Before closing the contactor at the output side, make sure that the inverter
power is ON and the motor is stopped.
7
Standard Specifications
1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5
11
15 18.5 22
30
37
45
2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 11.8 17.1 22.1 27
32
43
53
65
7.0 9.6 15.2 23
31
45
58 70.5 85 114 140 170
(6.0) (8.2) (13) (20) (26) (38) (49) (60) (72) (97) (119) (145)
120% for 60s, 150% for 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
Three-phase 200 to 240V
Overload current rating*4
Rated voltage*5
Rated input AC voltage/
frequency
Permissible AC voltage
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
fluctuation
7.5
11
*8
45
55
75
90
55
75
90
81 110 132
212 288 346
(180) (244) (294)
110
110
165
432
(367)
Standard
Specifications
4.0
4.8
8.0
11.5
16
20
27
32
41
52
65
79
99
—
—
—
1.2
2.6
3.3
5.0
8.1
10
16
19
24
31
41
50
61
74
110
132
165
70
70
Open type (IP00)
Forced air cooling
7.8
13
13
14
23
35
35
67
The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor. To use a dedicated IPM
motor, refer to page 88, 90.
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V.
When operating the inverter with the carrier frequency set to 3kHz or more, the carrier frequency automatically decreases if the inverter output current
exceeds the value in parentheses of the rated current. This may cause the motor noise to increase.
The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, protective structure of the inverter changes to an open type
(IP00).
FR-DU07: IP40 (except for the PU connector)
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
2.1
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
±5%
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
170 to 242V 50Hz, 170 to 264V 60Hz
Parameter
List
*6
*7
37
Explanations
of
Parameters
*5
30
Protective
Functions
*4
22
Options
*2
*3
18.5
Three-phase 200 to 220V 50Hz, 200 to 240V 60Hz
Protective structure (JEM 1030)*8
Enclosed type (IP20) *7
Cooling system
Self-cooling
Approx. mass (kg)
1.8
2.2 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.5 6.5
*1
15
Instructions
reactor
5.5
Motor
DC reactor
With DC
3.7
IPM
motor control
Power supply
system capacity
(kVA)*6
Without
2.2
Connection
example
1.5
Compatibility
Output
Power supply
Rated current (A)*3
0.75
0.75
1.6
4.2
(3.6)
Warranty
Type FR-F720P-K
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1
Rated capacity (kVA)*2
Features
Rating
200V class
8
400V class
Type FR-F740P-K
Power supply
Output
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1
Rated capacity (kVA)*2
Rated current (A)*3
1.5
2.2
3.7
0.75
1.6
2.1
(1.8)
1.5
2.7
3.5
(3.0)
2.2
3.7
4.8
(4.1)
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
5.8
8.8
12.2 17.5 22.1 26.7 32.8 43.4
7.6
11.5
16
23
29
35
43
57
(6.4) (9.8) (13)
(19)
(24)
(30)
(36)
(48)
120% 60s, 150% 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
Three-phase 380 to 480V
Overload current rating*4
Rated voltage*5
Rated input AC voltage/
frequency
Permissible AC voltage
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
fluctuation
Power supply
system capacity
(kVA)*6
Without
DC reactor
With DC
reactor
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *8
Cooling system
Approx. mass (kg)
2.1
4.0
4.8
8.0
1.2
2.6
3.3
5.0
3.5
Self-cooling
3.5
3.5
3.5
110
132
90
137
180
(153)
110
165
216
(183)
132
198
260
(221)
Power supply
Output
90
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
37
53.3
70
(60)
45
64.8
85
(72)
55
80.8
106
(90)
11.5
16
20
27
32
41
52
65
79
99
8.1
10
16
19
24
31
41
50
61
74
Open type (IP00)
Enclosed type (IP20) *7
75
110
144
(122)
Overload current rating*4
Rated voltage*5
Rated input AC voltage/
frequency
Permissible AC voltage
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
fluctuation
Without
DC reactor
With DC
reactor
11
±5%
75
Power supply
system capacity
(kVA)*6
7.5
323 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz
Type FR-F740P-K
Rated current (A)*3
5.5
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1
Rated capacity (kVA)*2
Protective structure (JEM 1030)*8
Cooling system
Approx. mass (kg)
9
0.75
3.5
160
6.5
185
Forced air cooling
7.5
7.5
13
6.5
220
250
280
315
355
160 185 220 250
280 315 355
247 275 329 366
416 464 520
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
(276) (306) (367) (408) (464) (518) (580)
120% 60s, 150% 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
Three-phase 380 to 480V
13
23
35
35
400
450
500
560
400
586
770
(654)
450
659
866
(736)
500
733
962
(817)
560
833
1094
(929)
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
323 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz
±5%
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
110
137
165
198
247
275
329
366
416
464
520
586
659
733
833
110
Open type (IP00)
Forced air cooling
110
175
175
175
260
260
370
370
370
37
50
57
72
72
The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor. To use a dedicated IPM
motor, refer to page 88, 90.
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440V.
When operating the inverter with the carrier frequency set to 3kHz or more, the carrier frequency automatically decreases if the inverter output current
exceeds the value in parentheses of the rated current. This may cause the motor noise to increase.
The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, protective structure of the inverter changes to an open type
(IP00).
FR-DU07: IP40 (except for the PU connector)
Operation specifications
Indication
For meter
Pulse train output
(Max. 2.4kHz: one terminal)
Analog output
(Max. 10VDC: one terminal)
Operation
panel
(FR-DU07)
Operating status
Parameter
unit
(FR-PU07)
Fault record
Interactive
guidance
The following signals can be assigned to Pr.54 FM terminal function selection(pulse train output) and Pr. 158 AM
terminal function selection (analog output): output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output
voltage, frequency setting value, running speed, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic
thermal relay load factor, input power, output power, load meter, reference voltage output, motor load factor,
energy saving effect, regenerative brake duty*1, PID set point, and PID measured value.
Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, fault display, frequency setting value,
running speed, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay load factor, input
power, output power, load meter, cumulative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor,
cumulative power, energy saving effect, cumulative energy savings, regenerative brake duty*1, PID set point,
PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, input terminal option monitor*3, output
terminal option monitor*3, option fitting status monitor*4, and terminal assignment status*4.
Fault record is displayed when a fault occurs. Past 8 fault records (output voltage/current/frequency/
cumulative energization time right before the fault occurs) are stored.
Function (help) for operation guide and troubleshooting*4
Connection
example
Standard
Specifications
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Parameter
List
50%
0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration modes are available.
General-purpose motor control: Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation
DC injection brake
voltage (0 to 30%) can be changed.
Stall prevention operation level Operation current level can be set (0 to 150% variable). Whether to use the function or not can be set.
Terminal 2 and 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, and 4 to 20mA are available.
Analog input
Terminal 1: -10 to +10V and -5 to 5V are available.
Frequency
setting signal
4-digit BCD or 16-bit binary using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit (when used with
Digital input
the option FR-A7AX)
Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Start signal
The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection): multi-speed
selection, remote setting, second function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection,
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start, external thermal relay input, inverter run
enable signal (FR-HC2/FR-CV connection), FR-HC2 connection (instantaneous power failure detection), PU
Input signals (twelve terminals) operation external interlock signal, PID control enable terminal, PU-External operation switchover, output
stop, start self-holding selection, forward rotation command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PTC
thermistor input, PID forward/reverse action switchover, PU/NET operation switchover, External/NET
operation switchover, command source switchover, DC feeding operation permission, DC feeding cancel,
and PID integral value reset.
Maximum and minimum frequency settings, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection,
polarity reversible operation, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, original operation
continuation at an instantaneous power failure, electronic bypass operation, forward/reverse rotation
Operational functions
prevention, remote setting, second and third function, multi-speed setting, regenerative avoidance, slip
compensation, operation mode selection, PID control, and computer link operation (RS-485)
The following signals can be assigned to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection): inverter running,
Output signal
up to frequency, instantaneous power failure/undervoltage, overload warning, output frequency detection,
Open collector output (five
second output frequency detection, regenerative brake prealarm*1, electronic thermal relay function preterminals)
alarm, PU operation mode, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID
Relay output (two terminals)
lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward/reverse rotation output, electronic bypass MC1*2, electronic bypass
MC2*2, electronic bypass MC3*2, fan fault output, heatsink overheat pre-alarm, inverter running start
command is ON, during deceleration at occurrence of power failure, during PID control activated, PID
deviation limit, IPM motor control*6, during retry, PID output interruption, pulse train output of output power,
Operating status
DC feeding, life alarm, fault output 3 (power-off signal), energy saving average value updated timing, current
average value monitor, fault output 2, maintenance timer alarm, remote output, alarm output, and fault output.
Fault code of the inverter can be output (4-bit) from the open collector.
When used with In addition to above, the following signals can be assigned to Pr.313 to Pr.319 (extension output terminal function
the FR-A7AY, FR- selection): control circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, and inrush current limit circuit
life. (Only positive logic can be set to the extension terminals of FR-A7AR.)
A7AR (option)
Acceleration/deceleration time
setting
Explanations
of
Parameters
Under Simple magnetic flux vector control and slip compensation: 120% (at 3Hz)
Protective
Functions
General-purpose
motor control
IPM motor control
Options
Starting
torque
Instructions
Digital input
Analog input
Frequency
accuracy
Digital input
Speed control range
Voltage/frequency
characteristics
Motor
Analog input
IPM
motor control
Control specifications
Frequency
setting
resolution
Compatibility
Output frequency range
High carrier frequency PWM control (V/F control)/Optimum excitation control/Simple magnetic flux vector
control/IPM motor control
0.5 to 400Hz
0.015Hz/60Hz (terminal 2 and 4: 0 to 10V/12-bit)
0.03Hz/60Hz (terminal 2 and 4: 0 to 5V/11bit, 0 to 20mA/approx.11-bit, terminal 1: 0 to 10V/12-bit)
0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to 5V/11-bit)
0.01Hz
Within 0.2% of the maximum output frequency (25°C 10°C)
Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
1:10 under V/F control, 1:15 under Simple magnetic flux vector control, 1:10 under IPM motor control
Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz. Constant-torque/variable-torque pattern or adjustable 5 points V/
F can be selected.
Warranty
Control method
Features
Common specification
10
Protective/
warning function
Protective
function
Environment
Warning function
*1
*2
*3
*4
11
Surrounding air temperature
Ambient humidity
Storage temperature*7
Atmosphere
Altitude/vibration
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration/stop,
overvoltage during acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration/stop,
inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, instantaneous
power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase loss*5, stall prevention stop, output side earth (ground)
fault overcurrent, output phase loss, external thermal relay operation*5, PTC thermistor operation*5, option
fault, parameter error, PU disconnection*5, retry count excess*5, CPU fault, operation panel power supply
short circuit, 24VDC power output short circuit, output current detection value excess*5, inrush current limit
circuit fault, communication fault (inverter), analog input fault, PID signal fault*5, internal circuit fault (15V
power supply), brake transistor alarm detection*1, loss of synchronism detection*6, overspeed occurrence*5*6.
Fan alarm, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, regenerative brake prealarm*5,
electronic thermal relay function prealarm, PU stop, maintenance timer alarm*3*5, parameter write error, copy
operation error, operation panel lock, parameter copy warning, password locked *5
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
90% RH or less (non-condensing)
-20°C to 65°C
Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s 2 or less *8 at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
This function is only available for 75K or higher.
This function is only available under general-purpose motor control.
This can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07).
This can be displayed only on the option parameter unit (FR-PU07).
*5
*6
*7
*8
This protective function is not available in the initial status.
This function is available only when an IPM motor is connected.
Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
2.9m/s2 or less for 185K or higher.
140
Instructions
Options
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
21
36
(Unit: mm)
*
2-φ6 hole
5
* The FR-F740P-0.75K to 2.2K are
not provided with cooling fans.
144
(Unit: mm)
Parameter
List
 FR-F720P-2.2K, 3.7K, 5.5K
 FR-F740P-0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K, 5.5K
Explanations
of
Parameters
D1
Protective
Functions
D
110
125
Motor
7.5
Inverter Model
IPM
motor control
245
260
FR-F720P-0.75K
FR-F720P-1.5K
Compatibility
125
150
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
D
Warranty
6
7.5
95
110
7.5
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
6
45.5
D1
Standard
Specifications
245
260
Connection
example
Features
7.5
Outline Dimension Drawing
FR-F720P-0.75K, 1.5K
2-φ6 hole
5
12
7.5
 FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K, 15K
 FR-F740P-7.5K, 11K, 15K, 18.5K
6
H
7.5
H1
2-φ6 hole
195
D
10
220
Inverter Model
H
H1
D
D1
260
245
170
84
300
285
190
101.5
D1
FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K
FR-F740P-7.5K, 11K
FR-F720P-15K
FR-F740P-15K, 18.5K
(Unit: mm)
211
10
 FR-F720P-18.5K, 22K, 30K
 FR-F740P-22K, 30K
10
380
400
2-φ10 hole
10
230
250
10.5
101.5
190
* The FR-F720P-30K is
not provided with a
wiring cover.
250
(Unit: mm)
13
3.2
W1
W
D
W
W1
W2
H1
H2
d
D
325
270
10
530
10
10
195
435
380
12
525
15
12
250
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Inverter Model
FR-F720P-37K
FR-F740P-37K
FR-F720P-45K, 55K
FR-F740P-45K, 55K
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
W2
Explanations
of
Parameters
(Unit: mm)
 FR-F740P-75K, 90K
 DC reactor supplied
15
2-φ12 hole
Parameter
List
10
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
H1
550
Standard
Specifications
Connection
example
H2
2-φd hole
Features
 FR-F720P-37K, 45K, 55K
 FR-F740P-37K, 45K, 55K
Rating plate
P
H1
P1, P
Instructions
H 10
H1
H
Options
P1
Protective
Functions
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
W1
D
DC reactor
Model
W
W1
H
H1
D
435
465
380
400
550
620
525
595
250
300
W
W1
H
H1
D
Mass
(kg)
FR-HEL-H75K
140 120 320 295 185
(FR-F740P-75K)
16
FR-HEL-H90K
150 130 340 310 190
(FR-F740P-90K)
20
IPM
motor control
Inverter Model
FR-F740P-75K
FR-F740P-90K
Within D
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M6 screw)
3.2
W1
W
4-installation hole
(for M6 screw)
Compatibility
12
2
(Unit: mm)
Warranty
10
W
Motor
E
14
 FR-F740P-110K
 DC reactor supplied
15
2-φ12 hole
Rating plate
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
10
10
310
340
P1
620
595
P1
P
P
E
130
4-installation hole
(for M6 screw)
150
Within 195
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M6 screw)
465
Mass
(kg)
DC reactor Model
3.2
10
400
FR-HEL-H110K(FR-F740P-110K)
300
22
(Unit: mm)
15
 FR-F720P-75K, 90K, 110K
 FR-F740P-132K, 160K
2-φ12 hole
 DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
715
740
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
P1
H 10
H1 10
P1
P
P
400
465
10
E
W1
3.2
360
W 2
4-installation hole
(for S screw)
Within D
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M6 screw)
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-75K(FR-F720P-75K)
FR-HEL-90K(FR-F720P-90K)
FR-HEL-110K(FR-F720P-110K)
FR-HEL-H132K(FR-F740P-132K)
FR-HEL-H160K(FR-F740P-160K)
W
W1
H
H1
D
S
Mass
(kg)
150
150
175
175
175
130
130
150
150
150
340
340
400
405
405
310
310
365
370
370
190
200
200
200
205
M6
M6
M8
M8
M8
17
19
20
26
28
(Unit: mm)
15
 FR-F740P-185K, 220K
200
3.2
49
380
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
200
10
12
49
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
985
1010
Standard
Specifications
Connection
example
15
Features
3-φ12 hole
498
Explanations
of
Parameters
185
214.5
Parameter
List
148.5
450
 DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
Protective
Functions
2-M6 eye nut (only for FR-HEL-H220K)
P1
Options
2-terminal (for M12 bolt)
Instructions
370 10
405 10
P1
P
P
4-installation hole
(for M8 screw)
Within 240
IPM
motor control
1
2
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M6 screw)
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
FR-HEL-H185K (FR-F740P-185K)
FR-HEL-H220K (FR-F740P-220K)
Mass
(kg)
Compatibility
DC reactor Model
29
30
(Unit: mm)
Warranty
150
175
Motor
E
16
 FR-F740P-250K, 280K, 315K
1010
984
3-φ12 holes
3.2
12
300
380
300
148
680
N/-
S/L2
P/+
V
R/L1
T/L3
U
W
185
214
P1
 DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
2-M8 eye nut
2-terminal (for bolt)
P1
H 10
H1 10
P1
P
P
E
W1
W
1
4-installation hole
(for S screw)
2
Within D
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H250K(FR-F740P-250K)
FR-HEL-H280K(FR-F740P-280K)
FR-HEL-H315K(FR-F740P-315K)
W
W1
H
H1
D
S

Mass
(kg)
190
190
210
165
165
185
440
440
495
400
400
450
250
255
250
M8
M8
M10
M12
M16
M16
35
38
42
(Unit: mm)
17
 FR-F740P-355K, 400K
Standard
Specifications
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
1330
1300
Connection
example
Features
3-φ12 hole
12
315
4.5
790
W
V
185
222
N/-
U
P/+
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
P1
Parameter
List
T/L3
S/L2
194
R/L1
4.5
440
 DC reactor supplied
 DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
Rating plate
2-M8 eye nut
2-terminal
4- 15 hole
Protective
Functions
2-M8 eye nut
Explanations
of
Parameters
315
2-terminal (for M16 bolt)
P1
210
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)
Within 250
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
195
Instructions
Options
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)
220
Within 250
Within 235
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H355K (FR-F740P-355K)
Mass
(kg)
46
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H400K (FR-F740P-400K)
Mass
(kg)
50
(Unit: mm)
Motor
E
185
IPM
motor control
75
40
P
E
P
Compatibility
10
10
40
Warranty
P
P
455
495 10
450 10
P1
500
P1
P1
18
 FR-F740P-450K, 500K, 560K
1580
1550
4-φ12 hole
4.5
12
300
300
300
4.5
440
P1
P/+
U
V
W
185
227
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
189
995
950
 DC reactor supplied
 DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
Rating plate
40
2-M8 eye nut
2-terminal
4- 15 hole
P1
P1
10
10
455
500
P1
2-terminal
4- 15 hole
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M12 screw)
P
E
40
75
Within 245
75
40
P
* Remove the eye nut after
installation of the product.
P
2-M12 eye nut
40
P1
P
E
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)
220
Within 270
Within H
195
Within 240
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H450K(FR-F740P-450K)
Mass
(kg)
150
215
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)
D1
10
D
10
57
DC reactor Model
H
D
D1
Mass
(kg)
FR-HEL-H500K (FR-F740P-500K)
FR-HEL-H560K (FR-F740P-560K)
345
360
455
460
405
410
67
85
(Unit: mm)
19
Operation panel connection connector
(FR-ADP option)
* Denotes the space required to connect an optional
parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB2). When
using another cable, leave the space required for the
cable specification.
(Unit: mm)
 Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07)
<Outline drawing>
<Panel cutting dimension drawing>
25.05
(11.45)
2.5
*1
40
Air-bleeding
hole
51
50
*1
40
4-R1
*1
57.8
26.5
26.5
4-φ4 hole
(Effective depth of
the installation
screws hole 5.0)
M3 screw *2
Instructions
56.8
67
135
*1
80.3
*1 When installing the FR-PU07 on the enclosure, etc., remove screws for
fixing the FR-PU07 to the inverter or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with
M3 nuts.
*2 Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective
depth of the installation screw hole.
Connection
example
Parameter
List
(14.2)
83
Standard
Specifications
72
25
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
16
3
Explanations
of
Parameters
72
78
81
Protective
Functions
3
Options
3
20
2-M3 screw
(Unit: mm)
Motor
22
44
44
50
Airbleeding
hole
IPM
motor control
21
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
Parameter unit connection
cable (FR-CB2
)
(option)
27.8
6
3
3.2max
120 or more *
Compatibility
Panel
FR-DU07
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
<Panel cutting dimension drawing>
Warranty
<Outline drawing>
Features
 Operation panel (FR-DU07)
20
Heatsink protrusion procedure
When encasing the inverter in an enclosure, the generated heat amount in an enclosure can be greatly reduced by installing the
heatsink portion of the inverter outside the enclosure. When installing the inverter in a compact enclosure, etc., this installation
method is recommended.
For the 185K or higher, a heatsink can be protruded outside the enclosure without using an attachment.
When using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN)
For the FR-F720P-2.2K to 110K and FR-F740P-0.75K to 160K, a heatsink can be protruded outside the enclosure using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FRA7CN).
Refer to the instruction manual of the heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN) for details.
Drawing after attachment installation (when used with the FR-A7CN)
Attachment
W
D
S screw
Type
W
H
H1
H2
H3
D
D1
D2
S
FR-A7CN01
FR-A7CN02
FR-A7CN03
FR-A7CN04
FR-A7CN05
FR-A7CN06
FR-A7CN07
FR-A7CN08
FR-A7CN09
FR-A7CN10
150
245
389.5
408.5
260
260
111.5
116.5
18
32
97
86
48.4
89.4
23.3
12.3
M5
M5
245
280
448.5
554
300
400
116.5
122
32
32
89
88.5
106.4
110.6
20
45.3
M5
M8
338
338
645
645
480
480
130
130
35
35
123.5
123.5
71.5
71.5
105
83.5
M8
M8
451
510
650
725
465
535
145
150
40
40
96
116.5
154
183.5
55
45
M10
M10
510
510
725
845
535
655
150
150
40
40
116.5
176.5
183.5
183.5
45
45
M10
M10
D1
D2
H1
H
H2
Panel
H3
(Unit: mm)
Attachment
Panel
Panel cut dimension drawing (when used with the FR-A7CN)
FR-A7CN02
FR-A7CN03
200
90
90
90
102
90
100
FR-A7CN04
175
102
175
112
40 102
FR-A7CN01
212
265
380
590
510
615
85
540
95
516
600
611
70
105
410
279
4-M10 screw
6-M8 screw
270
330
330
15
12
12
270
380
440
FR-A7CN09
FR-A7CN10
470
470
440
440
780
702
810
660
4-M10 screw
13
13
4-M10 screw
13
690
582
660
108
108
108
470
440
582
12.5
FR-A7CN07
290
516
440
335
517
FR-A7CN06
4-M10 screw
230
260
298
FR-A7CN08
400
400
400
477
477
477
Refer to page 68 for the correspondence table of the attachment and inverter.
21
40
195
212
4-M8 screw
690
320
195
145
6-M8 screw
7.5
407
136
FR-A7CN05
586
6-M5 screw
7.5
6-M5 screw
305
280
367
265
280
6-M5 screw
7.5
365
265
244
(Unit: mm)
Protrusion of heatsink of the FR-F740P-185K or higher
Panel cutting
 FR-F740P-250K, 280K, 315K
6-M10 screw
6-M10 screw
662
200
300
300
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
954
Hole
Hole
 FR-F740P-450K, 500K, 560K
6-M10 screw
976
21
771
315
300
8-M10 screw
300
Protective
Functions
Hole
Motor
IPM
motor control
Compatibility
Warranty
(Unit: mm)
Instructions
21
Options
1508
Hole
1550
1258
21
1300
Explanations
of
Parameters
21
315
300
Parameter
List
 FR-F740P-355K, 400K
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
15
18
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
984
954
985
Standard
Specifications
15
13
484
200
Connection
example
 FR-F740P-185K, 220K
Features
Cut the panel of the enclosure according to the inverter capacity.
22
 Shift and removal of a rear side installation frame
FR-F740P-185K to 315K
FR-F740P-355K or higher
One installation frame is attached to each of the upper
and lower part of the inverter. Change the position of the
rear side installation frame on the upper and lower side
of the inverter to the front side as shown below. When
Two installation frames each are attached to the
upper and lower parts of the inverter. Remove the
rear side installation frame on the upper and lower
side of the inverter as shown below.
changing the installation frames, make sure that the
installation orientation is correct.
Removal
Upper installation
frame (rear side)
Shift
Upper
installation
frame
Lower installation
frame (rear side)
Shift
Removal
Lower
installation
frame
Installation of the inverter
Push the inverter heatsink portion outside the enclosure and fix the enclosure and inverter with upper and lower installation
frame.
Enclosure
Inside the
enclosure Exhausted air
*
* For the FR-F740P-185K or higher, there are finger guards
behind the enclosure. Therefore, the thickness of the panel
should be less than 10mm(*1) and also do not place
anything around finger guards to avoid contact with the
finger guards.
Inverter
Enclosure
10*
1
140
Finger guard
6
Installation
frame
Dimension of
Cooling
wind the outside of
the enclosure
D1
Inverter Model
FR-F740P-185K, 220K
FR-F740P-250K to 560K
D1
185
184
(Unit: mm)
CAUTION
· Having a cooling fan, the cooling section which comes out of the enclosure cannot be used in the environment of water drops, oil,
mist, dust, etc.
· Be careful not to drop screws, dust etc. into the inverter and cooling fan section.
23
A1
STOP
RL
JOG
Second function selection
RT
SU
MRS
IPF
Output stop
RES *3
Reset
24VDC power supply
(Common for external power supply transistor)
PC
CS PTC
SD
Frequency setting signal (Analog)
3
2
1
Auxiliary (+)
input (-)
Terminal
4 input (+)
(-)
(Current
input)
Connector
Open collector output
Terminal functions
vary with the output
Up to frequency terminal assignment
(Pr. 190 to Pr. 194)
Instantaneous Refer to the
power failure
Instruction Manual
(Applied)
Overload
Frequency detection
SE
24V
PU
*4 Voltage/current connector
input switch
4 2
10E(+10V)
ON
FM
10(+5V)
OFF
0 to 5VDC Initial value
SD
2 0 to 10VDC
selectable *4
0 to 20mADC
5
AM
(Analog common)
Initial
0 to ±10VDC value
1
0 to ±5VDC selectable *4
Initial
4 to 20mADC value
4 0 to 5VDC
selectable *4
0 to 10VDC
5
SG
Option connector 1
*9. It is not necessary
when calibrating the
indicator from the
operation panel.
Terminating
resistor VCC
Connection
example
Indicator
- (Frequency
meter, etc.)
+
Calibration
resistor *9
(+)
(-)
Moving-coil type
1mA full-scale
Analog signal output
(0 to 10VDC)
RS-485 terminals
Data transmission
RXD+
RXD-
for plug-in option
connection
Open collector output common
Sink/source common
TXD+
TXD-
Standard
Specifications
Running
FU
SINK
AU
Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1k
*5
OL
AU
Terminal 4 input selection
(Current input selection)
Selection of automatic restart
after instantaneous
power failure
Contact input common
*5. It is recommended to use
2W1k when the
frequency setting signal is
changed frequently.
RUN
Protective
Functions
Jog operation
Refer to the Instruction
Manual (Applied)
Relay output 2
A2
Low speed
*4. Terminal input specifications
can be changed by analog
input specifications switchover
(Pr. 73, Pr. 267). Set the
voltage/current input switch in
the OFF position to select
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to
10V) and ON to select current
input (0 to 20mA).
B2
RM
Middle speed
*3. AU terminal can be
used as PTC input
terminal.
C2
RH
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
B1
STR
Relay output
Terminal functions
vary with the output
Relay output 1 terminal assignment
(Fault output) (Pr. 195, Pr. 196)
Refer to the
Instruction Manual
(Applied)
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
C1
STF
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Control circuit
SOURCE
Multi-speed
selection
Earth
(ground)
cable
*8. The 200V class 0.75K and 1.5K
are not provided with the ON/OFF
connector EMC filter.
Main circuit
Start self-holding selection
High speed
M
Parameter
List
EMC filter
ON/OFF
OFF connector *8
R1/L11
S1/L21
Earth
(Ground)
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)
Forward
Terminal functions vary
rotation
with the input terminal
start
assignment
Reverse
(Pr. 178 to Pr. 189)
Refer to the Instruction
rotation
start
Manual (Applied)
ON
Motor
Explanations
of
Parameters
*2. To supply power to the
control circuit separately,
remove the jumper across
R1/L11 and S1/L21.
*2
N/- CN8*6
U
V
W
Options
Jumper
PX*7
Inrush current
limit circuit
*7. Do not use PR and PX terminals.
Please do not remove the jumper
connected to terminal PR and PX.
Instructions
P/+ PR*7
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Three-phase AC
power supply
Jumper
Data reception
GND
5V (Permissible load
current 100mA)
CAUTION
· To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables more than 10cm away from the power cables. Also separate the
main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
· After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc. take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
· Set the voltage/current input switch correctly. Operation with a wrong setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
Motor
P1
MC
MCCB
Jumper
IPM
motor control
Earth
(ground)
*6. A CN8 (for MT-BU5)
connector is provided
with the 75K or higher.
Compatibility
Control circuit terminal
Resistor unit
(Option)
Brake unit
(Option)
*1
Warranty
*1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Be sure to connect the DC reactor
supplied with the 75K or higher.
When a DC reactor is connected
to the 55K or lower, remove the
jumper across P1 and P/+.
Sink logic
Main circuit terminal
Features
Terminal Connection Diagram
24
Terminal Specification Explanation
Type
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W
Main circuit
R1/L11, S1/L21
P/+, N/P/+, P1
PR, PX
Terminal Name
AC power input
Inverter output
Power supply for control
circuit
Description
Connect to the commercial power supply.
Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor or dedicated IPM motor.
Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/L2. To retain the alarm display and
alarm output, apply external power to this terminal.
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), power
Brake unit connection
regeneration converter (MT-RC) or high power factor converter (FR-HC2).
For the 55K or lower, remove the jumper across terminals P/+ - P1 and connect the DC reactor.
DC reactor connection
(For the 75K or higher, a DC reactor is supplied as standard.)
Please do not remove or use terminals PR and PX or the jumper connected.
Earth (Ground)
STF
Forward rotation start
STR
Reverse rotation start
STOP
RH, RM, RL
JOG
Contact input
RT
Control circuit input signal
Second acceleration/
deceleration time
selection
Output stop
RES
Reset
AU
Terminal 4 input
selection
PTC input
SD
PC
10E
10
Frequency setting
Jog mode selection
MRS
CS
25
Start self-holding
selection
Multi-speed selection
Selection of automatic
restart after
instantaneous power
failure
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).
Turn on the STF signal to start forward rotation and turn it off to
stop.
Turn on the STR signal to start reverse rotation and turn it off to
stop.
When the STF and STR
signals are turned on
simultaneously, the stop
command is given.
Turn on the STOP signal to self-hold the start signal.
Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH, RM and RL signals.
Turn on the JOG signal to select Jog operation (initial setting) and turn on the start signal (STF
or STR) to start Jog operation.
Turn on the RT signal to select second acceleration/deceleration time.
When the second function such as "second torque boost" and "second V/F (base frequency)"
are set, turning on the RT signal selects these functions.
Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter output.
Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by electromagnetic brake.
Used to reset alarm output provided when protective function is activated. Turn on the RES
signal for more than 0.1s, then turn it off.
Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.
Terminal 4 is made valid only when the AU signal is turned on. (The frequency setting signal can
be set between 4 and 20mADC.)
Turning the AU signal on makes terminal 2 (voltage input) invalid.
AU terminal is used as PTC input terminal (thermal protection of the motor). When using it as
PTC input terminal, set the AU/PTC switch to PTC.
When the CS signal is left on, the inverter restarts automatically at power restoration. Note that
restart setting is necessary for this operation. In the initial setting, a restart is disabled.
Contact input common
Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal FM.
(sink) (initial setting)
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open
External transistor
collector output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid
common (source)
malfunction by undesirable currents.
24VDC power supply
Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC terminal).
common
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
External transistor
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open
common (sink)
collector output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid
(initial setting)
malfunction by undesirable currents.
Contact input common
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).
(source)
24VDC power supply Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.
10VDC, permissible load
When connecting the frequency setting potentiometer at an initial
current 10mA.
Frequency setting power
status, connect it to terminal 10.
supply
5VDC, Permissible load
Change the input specifications when connecting it to terminal 10E.
current 10mA.
2
Frequency setting
(voltage)
4
Frequency setting
(current)
1
Frequency setting
auxiliary
5
Frequency setting
common
Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA) provides the
maximum output frequency at 5V (10V, 20mA) and makes
input and output proportional. Use Pr. 73 to switch from
among input 0 to 5VDC (initial setting), 0 to 10VDC, and 0
to 20mA.
Set the voltage/current input switch in the ON position to
select current input (0 to 20mA).
Voltage input:
Input resistance 10k±
1kMaximum
permissible voltage
20VDC
Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides the maximum Current input:
Input resistance 245±
output frequency at 20mA (5V, 10V) makes input and output
5
proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is
ON (terminal 2 input is invalid). Use Pr. 267 to switch from among Maximum permissible
input 4 to 20mA (initial setting), 0 to 5VDC, and 0 to 10VDC. Set the current 30mA
voltage/current input switch in the OFF position to select voltage
input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V).
Inputting 0 to ±5 VDC or 0 to ±10VDC adds this signal to terminal 2 or 4 frequency setting
signal. Use Pr.73 to switch between the input 0 to ±5VDC and 0 to ±10VDC (initial setting).
Input resistance 10k± 1kMaximum permissible voltage ± 20VDC
Common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4) and analog output terminal
AM. Do not earth (ground).
SE
Open collector output
common
Pulse
For meter
Analog
AM
Analog signal output
PU connector
RS-485
terminal
TXD+
TXDRXD+
RXDSG
PU connector
Inverter transmission
terminal
Inverter reception
terminal
Earth (Ground)
Common terminal for terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU
Output item:
Output frequency (initial setting)
Permissible load current 2mA
1440 pulse/s at 60Hz (general-purpose motor
control)
1440 pulse/s at 90Hz (IPM motor control with
Select one e.g. output frequency from monitor
30K or lower)
items. (Not output during inverter reset.)
1440 pulse/s at 120Hz (IPM motor control
The output signal is proportional to the
magnitude of the corresponding monitoring item. with 37K or higher)
Output item:
Output frequency (initial setting)
Output signal 0 to 10VDC Permissible load
current 1mA (load impedance 10k or more)
Resolution 8 bit
With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485.
(for connection on a 1:1 basis only)
. Conforming standard : EIA-485(RS-485)
. Transmission format
: Multidrop
. Communication speed : 4800 to 38400bps
. Overall length
: 500m
With the RS-485 terminal, communication can be made through RS-485.
Conforming standard
: EIA-485 (RS-485)
Transmission format
: Multidrop link
Communication speed : 300 to 38400bps
Overall length
: 500m
CAUTION
 The inverter will be damaged if power is applied to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W). Never perform such wiring.

indicates that terminal functions can be selected fromPr. 178 to Pr. 196 (I/O terminal function selection)
Features
Frequency detection
Connection
example
FU
Standard
Specifications
Instantaneous power
failure
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
IPF
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
Overload alarm
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
OL
Parameter
List
Up to frequency
Explanations
of
Parameters
SU
Protective
Functions
Inverter running
Options
RUN
Instructions
Relay output 2
Motor
A2, B2, C2
IPM
motor control
Relay output 1 (alarm
output)
Open collector
A1, B1, C1
Description
Changeover contact output indicates that the inverter protective function has activated and the
output stopped. Abnormal: No conduction across B-C (Across A-C Continuity), Normal: Across
B-C Continuity (No conduction across A-C) Contact capacity: 230VAC 0.3A (Power factor=0.4)
30VDC 0.3A
1 changeover contact output Contact capacity: 230VAC 0.3A (Power factor=0.4) 30VDC 0.3A
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or
higher than the starting frequency (initial value 0.5Hz). Switched
high during stop or DC injection brake operation. *
Permissible load 24VDC
Switched low when the output frequency reaches
0.1A
within the range of ±10% (initial value) of the set
(a voltage drop is 3.4V
frequency. Switched high during acceleration/
maximum when the signal
deceleration and at a stop.*
is on)
Switched low when stall prevention is activated
Alarm code
by the stall prevention function. Switched high
* Low indicates that the
when stall prevention is cancelled.*
open collector output
(4bit) output
transistor
is
on
Switched low when an instantaneous power
(Refer to page
(conducts).
High
failure and under voltage protections are
50)
indicates
that
the
activated.*
transistor is off (does not
Switched low when the inverter output frequency
conduct).
is equal to or higher than the preset detected
frequency and high when less than the preset
detected frequency.*
Compatibility
Terminal Name
Warranty
Terminal Symbol
FM
Communication
Control circuitoutput signal
Relay
Type
26
Explanations of the Operation Panel (FR-DU07)
(a) Unit indicator
(g) Monitor indicator
(b) Monitor (4-digit LED)
(h) IPM motor control indicator
(c) Setting dial
(i) Operation mode indicator
(d) PU/EXT key
(j) Rotation direction indicator
(e) MODE key
(k) FWD key, REV key
(f) SET key
(l) STOP/RESET key
No.
Component
Name
Description
(a)
Unit indicator
Hz: Lit to indicate frequency. (Flickers when the set frequency monitor is displayed.)
A: Lit to indicate current.
V: Lit to indicate voltage.
(b)
Monitor (4-digit LED)
Shows the frequency, parameter number, etc.
(To monitor the output power, set frequency and other items, set Pr.52.)
(c)
Setting dial
(d)
PU/EXT key
The dial of the Mitsubishi inverters. The setting dial is used to change the frequency and
parameter settings.
Press the setting dial to perform the following operations:
 To display a set frequency in the monitor mode
 To display the present setting during calibration
 To display a fault history number in the faults history mode
Used to switch between the PU and External operation modes.
To use the External operation mode (operation using a separately connected frequency setting
potentiometer and start signal), press this key to light up the EXT indicator.
(Press
simultaneously (0.5s), or change the Pr.79 setting to change to the combined
operation mode. )
PU: PU operation mode
EXT: External operation mode
Used to cancel the PU stop also.
Used to switch among different setting modes.
(e)
27
MODE key
Pressing
simultaneously changes the operation mode.
Holding this key for 2 seconds locks the operation. The key lock is invalid when Pr.161 = "0
(initial setting)." (Refer to page 55.)
Used to enter a setting.
Output frequency  Output current  Output voltage*
If pressed during the
operation, monitored item
* Energy saving monitor is displayed when the
changes as the following:
energy saving monitor is set with Pr. 52.
(f)
SET key
(g)
Monitor indicator
Lit to indicate the monitor mode.
(h)
IPM motor control
indicator
Lit to indicate IPM motor control.
Flickers to indicate IPM motor test operation.
(i)
Operation mode
indicator
(j)
Rotation direction
indicator
(k)
FWD key, REV key
FWD key: Used to give a start command in forward rotation.
REV key: Used to give a start command in reverse rotation.
(l)
STOP/RESET key
Used to stop operation commands.
Used to reset a fault when the protective function (fault) is activated.
PU: Lit to indicate the PU operation mode.
EXT: Lit to indicate the External operation mode. (EXT is lit at power-ON in the initial setting.)
NET: Lit to indicate the Network operation mode.
PU and EXT: Lit to indicate EXT/PU combined operation mode 1 and 2
FWD: Lit to indicate the forward rotation.
REV: Lit to indicate the reverse rotation.
Lit: When the forward/reverse operation is being performed.
Flickers: When the frequency command is not given even if the forward/reverse command is given.
When the frequency command is lower than the starting frequency.
When the MRS signal is being input.
Basic operation
Features
Operation mode switchover
and frequency flicker.
Frequency setting has been
written and completed!!
Output current monitor
Output voltage monitor
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
Value change
PU operation mode
(output frequency monitor)
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
(Example)
Parameter
List
(Example)
Value change
Parameter and a setting value
flicker alternately.
Explanations
of
Parameters
Displays the present
setting
Parameter setting mode
Protective
Functions
Parameter setting
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Monitor/frequency setting
PU Jog operation mode
Standard
Specifications
Connection
example
At power-ON (External operation mode)
All parameter
clear
Initial value change list
Fault clear
Faults history
[Operation for displaying faults history]
The past eight faults can be displayed.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault history exists,
is displayed.
While a fault is displayed:
The display shifts as follows by pressing
Output current
Output voltage
: Output frequency at the fault
Energization time.
(After Energization time, it goes back to a fault display.)
the setting dial shows the fault history number.
Compatibility
IPM parameter
initialization
Warranty
Automatic parameter
setting
IPM
motor control
Motor
Parameter copy
Instructions
Parameter clear
Options
Parameter write is completed!!
Pressing
28
Explanations of Parameter unit
Parameter unit (FR-PU07), parameter unit with battery pack (FR-PU07BB(-L))
 The parameter unit is a convenient tool for inverter
setting such as direct input method with a numeric
keypad, operation status indication, and help function.
 Eight languages can be displayed.
 Parameter setting values of maximum of three inverters
can be stored.
 With the FR-PU07BB(-L), parameter check and setting
change can be made without connecting a power supply
to the inverter. Use AA nickel hydride batteries, AA
alkali batteries, or AC adapter separately available as
power supply.
 Since the shape is specially designed for portable use, it
Key
Description
Use for parameter setting
Press to choose the parameter setting mode.
First priority monitor is displayed.
In the initial setting, the output frequency is displayed.
Operation cancel key
Used to display the function menu.
A variety of functions can be used on the function menu.
Used to shift to the next item in the setting or monitoring mode.
to
Used to enter a frequency, parameter number or set value.
Inverter operates in the External operation mode.
is easy to work with the FR-PU07BB(-L) in hand.
Used to select the PU operation mode to display the frequency
setting screen.
* The parameter unit connection cable FR-CB20 is required for
connecting to the inverter. (Parameter unit connection cable FRCB203(3m) is enclosed with FR-PU07BB(-L).)
* To use a parameter unit with battery pack (FR-PU07BB) outside Japan,
order a "FR-PU07BB-L" (parameter unit type indicated on the package
has L at the end). Since enclosed batteries may conflict with laws in
countries to be used (new EU Directive on batteries and accumulators,
etc.), batteries are not enclosed with an FR-PU07BB-L.
/
 Used to keep on increasing or decreasing the running
frequency. Hold down to vary the frequency.
 Press either of these keys on the parameter setting mode
screen to change the parameter setting value sequentially.
 On the selecting screen, these keys are used to move the cursor.
Forward rotation command key.
Reverse rotation command key.
FR-PU07
POWER lamp
 Stop command key.
 Used to reset the inverter when an alarm occurs.
Lit when the power turns on.
Monitor
 Used to write a set value in the setting mode.
 Used as a clear key in the all parameter clear or alarm history
clear mode.
Liquid crystal display
(16 characters 4 lines with backlight)
Interactive parameter setting
Trouble shooting guidance
Monitor (frequency, current, power, etc.)
 Used as a decimal point when entering numerical value.
 Press to read the item selected with the cursor.
ALARM lamp
Lit to indicate an inverter alarm occurrence.
Operation keys
(Refer to the table on the right)
FR-PU07 attached to the inverter
<Outline drawing>
83
8.2
18
46.7
6
Low battery warning lamp
Lit when the battery is low.
Green: Normal condition
Orange: Low battery (lasts 50 min.)
135
FR-PU07BB(-L)
44.7
46.7
Power switch
Turn ON this switch
to use the parameter
unit in the battery mode.
(Unit: mm)
Main functions
Function
Monitor
Description
6 types of monitors appear by simply pressing
.
For PU operation mode and External/PU combined operation mode (Pr.79 = "3"), frequency setting is available.
Frequency setting
Settings is performed by the direct setting, which sets frequency directly by
sets frequency continuously by
Parameter Setting
Batch copy
Operation
to
.
Reading parameter and changing setting values are easily done. To change the setting value of an parameter, specify
the parameter number, or select a parameter from the functional parameter list.
FR-PU07 (PU07BB) reads parameter settings of an inverter, and stores three different parameter settings.
FR-PU07 (PU07BB) can also copy the stored parameter setting to another inverter of the same series, or verify its
stored parameter setting against the parameter setting stored in an inverter.
Switching between External operation mode [EXT] and PU operation mode [PU] is easy.
Start/stop is enabled during PU operation mode and External/PU operation mode (Pr.79 = "3").
* Available function differs by the inverter. Please refer to the instruction manual of the inverter and the parameter unit
29
, and the step setting, which
FR-SW3-SETUP-WE *1
(Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional SP4 or later, XP Home Edition SP2 or later, XP Professional SP2 or later,
Windows Vista® SP1 or later, Windows® 7 supported)
Connection
example
FR Configurator is software that offers an easy operating environment.
Can be utilized effectively from inverter setting up to maintenance.
Parameter setting, monitoring, etc. can be performed on a display of Windows* personal
computer.
RS-485 communication connects a personal computer to an inverter.
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
USB cable
From station number to parameter setting, setting with
wizard style dialog (interactive) is available.
Procedure for Easy Setup
(1) System File setting
(2) Communication setting
(3) Inverter recognition
(4) Control method selection
(5) Motor setting
(6) Start command, frequency
command setting
(7) Parameter setting
Navigation area
In Navigation area, switching ONLINE/
OFFLINE and changing operation mode can be
performed.
(1) Frequency setting and forward/reverse
rotation [Test operation]
(2) Display the connected inverter in tree view
[System List]
(3) Function setting without regard to
parameter number [Basic setting]
(4) Estimates the cause of trouble, and
suggests counteraction. [Troubleshooting]
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Parameter
List
Explanations
of
Parameters
System area
In
System
area,
parameter
setting,
Diagnosis,
Troubleshooting, etc. can be performed.
(1) Parameter reading, writing,
verification, Functional List
and Individual List display are
available.
[Parameter List]
(2) Displays alarm history and
monitor value at each alarm
occurrence. [Diagnosis]
(3) Parameter setting conversion from conventional models
[Convert]
Setting wizard
Setting wizard can set parameters with wizard style dialog
(interactive). Inputting or selecting required items for each
function, parameter setting can be made, without regard to
parameter number.
Help
Displays operating
parameters.
instructions
and
details
of
each
FR-SW3-SETUP-WE is available for download (free of charge) from the below URL on the internet. FR Configurator SW3 (FR-SW3-SETUP-WE
or FR-SW1-SETUP-WE) needs to be installed to the personal computer prior to updating the software. Also, user registration is required for the
download (free of charge.) (Registration is free of charge.)
Homepage address http://www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/fa/
FR-SW3-SETUP-WE (for 700 series) and FR-SW1-SETUP-WE (500 series) can be installed from the FR Configurator SW3.
Protective
Functions
Easy Setup
In Monitor area, inverter status can be monitored.
(1) Displays monitor data in
waveform [Graph]
(2) Monitors the status of I/O
terminals. [I/O Terminal
Monitor]
(3) Displays multiple data in
batch [Batch Monitor]
Options
Desired function can be performed just after a start-up of the
software.
(1) Open the recent used System
File
(2) Perform Easy Setup
(3) Perform each function
(4) Help
Monitor area
Instructions
Startup
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
PU connector
or
RS-485 terminal
Motor
USB/RS-485
converter
IPM
motor control
RS-232C/RS-485
converter
Inverter
Compatibility
Serial cable
USB connector
Warranty
Personal computer
(FR Configurator)
or
Standard
Specifications
* Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries
Serial port
Features
FR Configurator (INVERTER SETUP SOFTWARE)
30
Parameter List
For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the
necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be made
from the operation panel (FR-DU07). For details of parameters, refer to the instruction manual.
POINT
· Only simple mode parameters are displayed by the initial setting of Pr.160 User group read selection. Set Pr.160 User
group read selection as required.
· To use the inverter under IPM motor control, refer to page 93.
Simple mode parameter
Parameter
Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name
Range
Increments
Initial Value
Refer to
page
0.1%
6/4/3/2/1.5/1% *1
39
Torque boost
0 to 30%
Maximum frequency
0 to 120Hz
0.01Hz
120/60Hz *2
39
Minimum frequency
0 to 120Hz
0.01Hz
0Hz
39
Base frequency
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
60Hz
39
Multi-speed setting (high speed)
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
60Hz
39
Multi-speed setting (middle speed)
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
30Hz
39
Multi-speed setting (low speed)
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
10Hz
39
Acceleration time
0 to 3600/ 360s
0.1/0.01s
5s/15s *3
40
Deceleration time
0 to 3600/ 360s
0.1/0.01s
10s/30s *3
40
Rated inverter
current
40
Electronic thermal O/L relay
0 to 500/0 to 3600A *2
Energy saving control selection
0, 4, 9
1
0
47
Operation mode selection
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7
1
0
51
125
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
frequency
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
60Hz
53
126
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
frequency
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
60Hz
53
160
User group read selection
0, 1, 9999
1
9999
55
998
IPM parameter initialization
0, 1, 12, 22, 32, 101, 112,
122, 132
1
0
92
999
Automatic parameter setting
10, 11, 20, 21, 30, 31,
9999
1
9999
63
60
79
0.01/0.1A
*2
Extended mode parameter
Remarks
 The parameters marked with  indicate simple mode parameters.
 The shaded parameters in the table allow its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77
Parameter write selection.
Function
Parameters
Basic functions
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DC
injection
9
—
—
*1
*2
*3
*4
31
Name
Setting Range
Increments
Initial Value
Refer to page
Torque boost
0 to 30%
0.1%
6/4/3/2/1.5/1% *1
39
Maximum frequency
0 to 120Hz
0.01Hz
120/60Hz *2
39
Minimum frequency
0 to 120Hz
0.01Hz
0Hz
39
Base frequency
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
60Hz
39
Multi-speed setting (high speed)
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
60Hz
39
Multi-speed setting (middle speed)
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
30Hz
39
Multi-speed setting (low speed)
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
10Hz
39
Acceleration time
0 to 3600/ 360s
0.1/0.01s
5s/15s *3
40
Deceleration time
0 to 3600/ 360s
0.1/0.01s
10s/30s *3
40
0.01/0.1A *2
Rated inverter
current
40
Electronic thermal O/L relay
0 to 500/0 to 3600A *2
10
11
DC injection brake operation frequency
0 to 120Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
3Hz
40
DC injection brake operation time
0 to 10s
0.1s
0.5s
40
12
DC injection brake operation voltage
0 to 30%
0.1%
4/2/1% *4
40
13
14
Starting frequency
0 to 60Hz
0.01Hz
0.5Hz
41
Load pattern selection
0, 1
1
1
41
Differ according to capacities. (6%:0.75K, 4%:1.5K to 3.7K, 3%:5.5K, 7.5K, 2%:11K to 37K, 1.5%:45K, 55K, 1%:75K or higher)
Differ according to capacities. (55K or lower / 75K or higher)
Differ according to capacities. (7.5K or lower / 11K or higher)
Differ according to capacities. (4%: 7.5K or lower, 2%: 11K to 55K , 1%: 75K or higher)
Acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency
1 to 400Hz
21
Acceleration/deceleration time increments
0, 1
22
Stall prevention operation level
23
Frequency jump
Automatic
restart functions
Monitor functions
Second functions
Frequency
detection
—
—
—
—
39
0.1V
9999
39
0.01Hz
60Hz
40
1
0
40
0 to 150%, 9999
0.1%
120%
42
Stall prevention operation level
compensation factor at double speed
0 to 200%, 9999
0.1%
9999
42
Multi-speed setting (4 speed to 7 speed)
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
39
Multi-speed input compensation selection
0, 1
1
0
42
Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection
0, 1, 2, 3, 6
1
0
43
30
Regenerative function selection
0, 2, 10, 20/
0, 1, 2, 10, 11, 20, 21
1
0
43
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Frequency jump 1A
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
44
Frequency jump 1B
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
44
Frequency jump 2A
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
44
Frequency jump 2B
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
44
Frequency jump 3A
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
44
Frequency jump 3B
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
44
Speed display
0, 1 to 9998
1
0
44
41
Up-to-frequency sensitivity
0 to 100%
0.1%
10%
44
42
Output frequency detection
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
6Hz
44
43
Output frequency detection for reverse
rotation
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
44
Second acceleration/deceleration time
0 to 3600/360s
0.1/0.01s
5s
40
Second deceleration time
0 to 3600/360s, 9999
0.1/0.01s
9999
40
Second torque boost
0 to 30%, 9999
0.1%
9999
39
Second V/F (base frequency)
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
39
Second stall prevention operation current
0 to 150%
0.1%
120%
42
Second stall prevention operation frequency 0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
0Hz
42
Second output frequency detection
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
30Hz
44
51
Second electronic thermal O/L relay
0 to 500A, 9999/
0 to 3600A, 9999 *
9999
40
52
DU/PU main display data selection
0, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17, 20,
23 to 25, 50 to 57, 100
1
0
45
54
FM terminal function selection
1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17, 21,
24, 50, 52, 53
1
1
45
55
Frequency monitoring reference
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
60Hz
45
Rated inverter
current
45
24 to 27
28
29
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
*
0.01/0.1A
*
56
Current monitoring reference
0 to 500/0 to 3600A *
0.01/0.1A
57
Restart coasting time
0, 0.1 to 5s, 9999/
0, 0.1 to 30s, 9999 *
0.1s
9999
46, 47
58
Restart cushion time
0 to 60s
0.1s
1s
46
Remote function selection
0, 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13
1
0
47
Energy saving control selection
0, 4, 9
1
0
47
Retry selection
0 to 5
1
0
48
59
 60
65
*
Features
20
41
*
Connection
example
0 to 1000V, 8888, 9999
0
120/60Hz
Standard
Specifications
Base frequency voltage
1
0.01Hz
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
120 to 400Hz
41
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
0, 2, 4
High speed maximum frequency
0.5s
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
MRS input selection
0.1/0.01s
Parameter
List
17
18
19
41
Explanations
of
Parameters
—
—
—
5Hz
Protective
Functions
0 to 3600/360s
0.01Hz
Options
Jog acceleration/deceleration time
Refer to page
Instructions
16
Initial Value
Motor
0 to 400Hz
Increments
IPM
motor control
Jog frequency
—
Setting Range
Compatibility
Jog
operation
15
—
—
Name
IWarranty
Parameters
Multi-speed
Stall
Acceleration/
setting
prevention deceleration times
Function
* Differ according to capacities. (55K or lower / 75K or higher)
32
Function
Parameters
—
66
Retry
67
68
69
70
—
Setting Range
Stall prevention operation reduction starting
0 to 400Hz
frequency
Number of retries at fault occurrence
0 to 10, 101 to 110
Retry waiting time
0 to 10s
Retry count display erase
0
Special regenerative brake duty *2
0 to 10%
Increments
Initial Value
Refer to page
0.01Hz
60Hz
42
1
0
48
0.1s
1s
48
1
0
48
0.1%
0%
43
1
0
48
—
71
Applied motor
0, 1, 2, 20, 120, 210, 2010,
2110
—
—
—
72
73
74
PWM frequency selection
0 to 15/0 to 6, 25
1
2
48
Analog input selection
0 to 7, 10 to 17
1
1
49
Input filter time constant
0 to 8
1
1
49
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/
PU stop selection
0 to 3, 14 to 17
1
14
50
Fault code output selection
0, 1, 2
1
0
50
Parameter write selection
0, 1, 2
1
0
50
Reverse rotation prevention selection
0, 1, 2
1
0
50
Operation mode selection
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7
1
0
51
80
Motor capacity
0.4 to 55kW, 9999/
0 to 3600kW, 9999
9999
51
90
Motor constant (R1)
0 to 50, 9999/
0 to 400m, 9999
0.001/
0.01m *1
9999
51
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
 125
 126
127
V/F1(first frequency)
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
52
V/F1(first frequency voltage)
0 to 1000V
0.1V
0V
52
V/F2(second frequency)
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
52
V/F2(second frequency voltage)
0 to 1000V
0.1V
0V
52
V/F3(third frequency)
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
52
V/F3(third frequency voltage)
0 to 1000V
0.1V
0V
52
V/F4(fourth frequency)
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
52
V/F4(fourth frequency voltage)
0 to 1000V
0.1V
0V
52
V/F5(fifth frequency)
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
52
V/F5(fifth frequency voltage)
0 to 1000V
0.1V
0V
52
PU communication station number
0 to 31
1
0
52
PU communication speed
48, 96, 192, 384
1
192
52
PU communication stop bit length
0, 1, 10, 11
1
1
52
PU communication parity check
0, 1, 2
1
2
52
Number of PU communication retries
0 to 10, 9999
1
1
52
PU communication check time interval
0, 0.1 to 999.8s, 9999
0.1s
9999
52
PU communication waiting time setting
0 to 150ms, 9999
1
9999
52
PU communication CR/LF selection
0, 1, 2
1
1
52
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
60Hz
53
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
60Hz
53
PID control automatic switchover frequency 0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
53
1
10
53
75
—
—
—
—
76
77
78
 79
PU connector
communication
Adjustable 5 points V/F
Simple magnetic
flux vector control
IPM motor control
—
PID operation
—
—
*1
*2
33
Name
*1
*1
*1
0.01/0.1kW
*1
128
PID action selection
10, 11, 20, 21, 50, 51, 60,
61, 110, 111, 120, 121
129
130
131
132
133
134
PID proportional band
0.1 to 1000%, 9999
0.1%
100%
53
PID integral time
0.1 to 3600s, 9999
0.1s
1s
53
PID upper limit
0 to 100%, 9999
0.1%
9999
53
PID lower limit
0 to 100%, 9999
0.1%
9999
53
PID action set point
0 to 100%, 9999
0.01%
9999
53
PID differential time
0.01 to 10.00s, 9999
0.01s
9999
53
Differ according to capacities. (7.5K or lower / 11K or higher)
Setting can be made for the 75K or higher.
54
Bypass selection at a fault
0, 1
1
0
54
139
Automatic switchover frequency from
inverter to bypass operation
0 to 60Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
54
140
Backlash acceleration stopping frequency
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
1Hz
43
141
Backlash acceleration stopping time
0 to 360s
0.1s
0.5s
43
142
Backlash deceleration stopping frequency
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
1Hz
43
143
Backlash deceleration stopping time
0 to 360s
0.1s
0.5s
43
—
144
Speed setting switchover
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 102, 104,
106, 108, 110
1
4
44
145
PU display language selection
0 to 7
1
0
54
—
147
Acceleration/deceleration time switching
frequency
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
40
148
149
150
151
152
153
Stall prevention level at 0V input
0 to 150%
0.1%
120%
42
Stall prevention level at 10V input
0 to 150%
0.1%
150%
42
Output current detection level
0 to 150%
0.1%
120%
54
Output current detection signal delay time
0 to 10s
0.1s
0s
54
Zero current detection level
0 to 150%
0.1%
5%
54
Zero current detection time
0 to 10s
0.01s
0.5s
54
0, 1, 10, 11
1
1
42
1
0
54
154
—
155
RT signal function validity condition
selection
0, 10
—
—
156
157
Stall prevention operation selection
0 to 31, 100, 101
OL signal output timer
0 to 25s, 9999
1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17, 21,
24, 50, 52, 53
—
158
AM terminal function selection
—
159
Automatic switchover frequency range from
0 to 10Hz, 9999
bypass to inverter operation
—
 160
1
0
42
0.1s
0s
42
1
1
45
0.01Hz
9999
54
User group read selection
0, 1, 9999
1
9999
55
161
0, 1, 10, 11
1
0
55
Automatic restart after instantaneous power
0, 1, 10, 11
failure selection
1
0
46, 47
163
164
First cushion time for restart
0 to 20s
0.1s
0s
46
First cushion voltage for restart
0 to 100%
0.1%
0%
46
165
Stall prevention operation level for restart
0 to 150%
0.1%
120%
46
166
Output current detection signal retention
time
0 to 10s, 9999
0.1s
0.1s
54
167
Output current detection operation selection 0, 1, 10, 11
1
0
54
—
—
168
169
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
170
Watt-hour meter clear
0, 10, 9999
1
9999
45
171
Operation hour meter clear
0, 9999
1
9999
45
172
User group registered display/batch clear
9999, (0 to 16)
1
0
55
173
User group registration
0 to 999, 9999
1
9999
55
174
User group clear
0 to 999, 9999
1
9999
55
User group
Motor
162
Cumulative
monitor clear
Current
Automatic
detection restart functions
—
Frequency setting/key lock operation
selection
IPM
motor control
—
Voltage reduction selection during stall
prevention operation
Features
0.5s
Connection
example
0.1s
Standard
Specifications
0 to 100s
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
54
Start waiting time
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
54
1s
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
0
0.1s
Parameter
List
1
0 to 100s
Explanations
of
Parameters
0, 1
MC switchover interlock time
Backlash
measures
Electronic bypass sequence selection
Protective
Functions
Refer to page
Options
Initial Value
Instructions
Increments
Compatibility
Setting Range
IWarranty
Bypass
135
136
137
138
Name
PU
Parameters
Current detection
Function
34
Multi-speed
setting
Output terminal function assignment
Input terminal function assignment
Function
Setting Range
Increments
Initial Value
Refer to page
178
STF terminal function selection
0 to 8, 10 to 12, 14, 16, 24,
25, 60, 62, 64 to 67,
70 to 72, 9999
1
60
55
179
STR terminal function selection
0 to 8, 10 to 12, 14, 16, 24,
25, 61, 62, 64 to 67,
70 to 72, 9999
1
61
55
180
181
182
183
RL terminal function selection
1
0
55
1
1
55
1
2
55
1
3
55
1
4
55
RM terminal function selection
RH terminal function selection
0 to 8, 10 to 12, 14, 16, 24,
25, 62, 64 to 67, 70 to 72,
9999
RT terminal function selection
0 to 8, 10 to 12, 14, 16, 24,
25, 62 to 67, 70 to 72, 9999
184
AU terminal function selection
185
186
187
188
189
JOG terminal function selection
1
5
55
CS terminal function selection
1
6
55
1
24
55
1
25
55
1
62
55
190
RUN terminal function selection
1
0
56
1
1
56
1
2
56
1
3
56
1
4
56
1
99
56
1
9999
56
0.01Hz
9999
39
MRS terminal function selection
STOP terminal function selection
RES terminal function selection
191
SU terminal function selection
192
IPF terminal function selection
193
OL terminal function selection
194
FU terminal function selection
195
ABC1 terminal function selection
196
ABC2 terminal function selection
232 to 239 Multi-speed setting (8 speed to 15 speed)
240
241
0 to 8, 10 to 12, 14, 16, 24,
25, 62, 64 to 67, 70 to 72,
9999
0 to 5, 7, 8, 10 to 19, 25, 26,
45 to 48, 57, 64, 67, 70, 79,
85, 90 to 96, 98, 99, 100 to
105, 107, 108, 110 to 116,
125, 126, 145 to 148, 157,
164, 167, 170, 179, 185,
190 to 196, 198, 199, 9999
0 to 5, 7, 8, 10 to 19, 25, 26,
45 to 48, 57, 64, 67, 70, 79,
85, 90, 91, 94 to 96, 98, 99,
100 to 105, 107, 108,
110 to 116, 125, 126,
145 to 148, 157, 164, 167,
170, 179, 185, 190, 191,
194 to 196, 198, 199, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
Soft-PWM operation selection
0, 1
1
1
48
Analog input display unit switchover
0, 1
1
0
53
0 to 100%
0.1%
100%
49
0.1%
75%
49
—
242
Terminal 1 added compensation amount
(terminal 2)
—
243
Terminal 1 added compensation amount
(terminal 4)
0 to 100%
—
244
Cooling fan operation selection
0, 1
1
1
56
245
Rated slip
0 to 50%, 9999
0.01%
9999
56
246
Slip compensation time constant
0.01 to 10s
0.01s
0.5s
56
247
Constant-power range slip compensation
selection
0, 9999
1
9999
56
—
250
Stop selection
0 to 100s, 1000 to 1100s,
8888, 9999
0.1s
9999
56
—
251
Output phase loss protection selection
0, 1
1
1
57
252
Override bias
0 to 200%
0.1%
50%
49
253
Override gain
0 to 200%
0.1%
150%
49
Frequency compensation
function
35
Name
Slip
compensation
—
—
Parameters
57
Main circuit capacitor life display
(0 to 100%)
1%
100%
57
Main circuit capacitor life measuring
0, 1
1
0
57
PWM frequency automatic switchover
0, 1
1
1
48
Power failure stop selection
0, 1, 2, 21, 22
1
0
57
Subtracted frequency at deceleration start
0 to 20Hz
0.01Hz
3Hz
57
Subtraction starting frequency
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
60Hz
57
Power-failure deceleration time 1
0 to 3600/ 360s
0.1/0.01s
5s
57
Power-failure deceleration time 2
0 to 3600/ 360s, 9999
0.1/0.01s
9999
57
Power failure deceleration time switchover
frequency
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
60Hz
57
267
268
269
Terminal 4 input selection
0, 1, 2
1
0
49
Monitor decimal digits selection
0, 1, 9999
1
9999
45
296
Password lock level
0 to 6, 99, 100 to 106, 199,
9999
1
9999
58
297
Password lock/unlock
(0 to 5), 1000 to 9998, 9999
1
9999
58
—
299
Rotation direction detection selection at
restarting
0, 1, 9999
1
9999
46
331
RS-485 communication station number
0 to 31(0 to 247)
1
0
52
332
RS-485 communication speed
3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96, 192,
384
1
96
52
333
RS-485 communication stop bit length
0, 1, 10, 11
1
1
52
334
RS-485 communication parity check
selection
0, 1, 2
1
2
52
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
374
RS-485 communication retry count
0 to 10, 9999
1
1
52
RS-485 communication check time interval
0, 0.1 to 999.8s, 9999
0.1s
0s
52
RS-485 communication waiting time setting
0 to 150ms, 9999
1ms
9999
52
Communication operation command source 0, 1
1
0
59
Communication speed command source
0, 1, 2
1
0
59
Communication startup mode selection
0, 1, 2, 10, 12
1
0
51
RS-485 communication CR/LF selection
0, 1, 2
1
1
52
Communication EEPROM write selection
0, 1
1
0
52
Communication error count
—
1
0
52
Overspeed detection level
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
59
495
Remote output selection
0, 1, 10, 11
1
0
59
496
Remote output data 1
0 to 4095
1
0
59
497
Remote output data 2
0 to 4095
1
0
59
502
Stop mode selection at communication error 0 to 3
1
0
52
503
Maintenance timer
0(1 to 9998)
1
0
60
504
Maintenance timer alarm output set time
0 to 9998, 9999
1
9999
60
505
522
Speed setting reference
1 to 120Hz
0.01Hz
60Hz
44
Output stop frequency
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0.01Hz
9999
60
0, 0.1 to 999.8s, 9999
0.1s
9999
52
RS-485 communication
—
—
—
Remote
output
—
Maintenance
—
—
539
Modbus-RTU communication check time
interval
Communication
—
—
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
549
Protocol selection
0, 1
1
0
52
550
NET mode operation command source
selection
0, 1, 9999
1
9999
59
551
PU mode operation command source
selection
1, 2
1
2
59
Features
100%
Connection
example
1%
Standard
Specifications
(0 to 100%)
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
57
Control circuit capacitor life display
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
57
100%
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
0
1%
Parameter
List
1
(0 to 100%)
Explanations
of
Parameters
(0 to 15)
Inrush current limit circuit life display
Protective
Functions
Life alarm status display
Options
Refer to page
Instructions
Initial Value
Motor
Increments
IPM
motor control
266
Setting Range
Compatibility
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
Name
Password
function
Power failure stop
—
Parameters
IWarranty
Life check
Function
36
Parameters
Setting Range
Increments
Initial Value
Refer to page
PID deviation limit
0 to 100.0%, 9999
0.1%
9999
53
554
PID signal operation selection
0 to 3, 10 to 13
1
0
53
555
Current average time
0.1 to 1.0s
0.1s
1s
60
556
Data output mask time
0.0 to 20.0s
0.1s
0s
60
557
Current average value monitor signal output
0 to 500/0 to 3600A *2
reference current
0.01/0.1A *2
Rated inverter
current
60
—
—
—
563
564
571
575
576
577
611
Energization time carrying-over times
(0 to 65535)
1
0
45
Operating time carrying-over times
(0 to 65535)
1
0
45
Holding time at a start
0.0 to 10.0s, 9999
0.1s
9999
41
Output interruption detection time
0 to 3600s, 9999
0.1s
1s
53
Output interruption detection level
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
0Hz
53
Output interruption cancel level
900 to 1100%
0.1%
1000%
53
Acceleration time at a restart
0 to 3600s, 9999
0.1s
5/15s *2
46, 47
653
Speed smoothing control
0 to 200%
0.1%
0%
60
654
Speed smoothing cutoff frequency
0 to 120Hz
0.01Hz
20Hz
60
665
Regeneration avoidance frequency gain
0 to 200%
0.1%
100%
61
—
779
Operation frequency during communication
0 to 400Hz, 9999
error
0.01Hz
9999
52
—
—
791
792
PID
control
553
Speed smoothing
control
—
Acceleration time in low-speed range
0 to 3600/360s, 9999
0.1/0.01s
9999
40
Deceleration time in low-speed range
0 to 3600/360s, 9999
0.1/0.01s
9999
40
0.1kWh
1kWh
61
1
20
61
1%
25%
61
0.001s
0.333s
61
799
Pulse increment setting for output power
—
800
Control method selection
9, 20
820
Speed control P gain 1
0 to 1000%
821
Speed control integral time 1
0 to 20s
—
—
—
867
870
872
882
AM output filter
0 to 5s
Speed detection hysteresis
0 to 5Hz
Input phase loss protection selection
0, 1
Free
parameter
Regeneration
avoidance function
—
0.1kWh, 1kWh, 10kWh,
100kWh, 1000kWh
Adjustment
function
—
*1
*2
37
Name
Current average
PID
monitor
operation
Function
Regeneration avoidance operation selection 0, 1, 2
0.01s
0.01s
45
0.01Hz
0Hz
44
1
0
57
1
0
61
0.1V
DC380V/
DC760V*1
61
1
0
61
0.01Hz
6Hz
61
883
Regeneration avoidance operation level
300 to 800V
884
Regeneration avoidance at deceleration
detection sensitivity
0 to 5
885
Regeneration avoidance compensation
frequency limit value
0 to 30Hz, 9999
886
Regeneration avoidance voltage gain
0 to 200%
0.1%
100%
61
888
Free parameter 1
0 to 9999
1
9999
61
889
Free parameter 2
0 to 9999
1
9999
61
Differ according to the voltage class. (200V class/400V class).
Differ according to capacities. (55K or lower / 75K or higher)
62
894
Control selection during commercial power0, 1, 2, 3
supply operation
1
0
62
C44
(935) *2
C45
(935) *2
989
990
991
0.1 to 55/0 to 3600kW
Power saving rate reference value
0, 1, 9999
Power unit cost
0 to 500, 9999
Power saving monitor average time
*1
1
9999
62
0.01
9999
62
0, 1 to 1000h, 9999
1h
9999
62
Power saving cumulative monitor clear
0, 1, 10, 9999
1
9999
62
Operation time rate (estimated value)
0 to 100%, 9999
0.1%
9999
62
FM terminal calibration
—
—
—
62
AM terminal calibration
—
—
—
62
0.01Hz
0Hz
53
0.1%
0%
53
0.01Hz
60Hz
53
0.1%
100%
53
0.01Hz
0Hz
53
0.1%
20%
53
0.01Hz
60Hz
53
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 0 to 400Hz
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
0 to 300%
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 0 to 400Hz
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
0 to 300%
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 0 to 400Hz
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
0 to 300%
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 0 to 400Hz
0 to 300%
0.1%
100%
53
PID display bias coefficient
0 to 500.00, 9999
0.01
9999
53
PID display bias analog value
0 to 300.0%
0.1%
20%
53
PID display gain coefficient
0 to 500.00, 9999
0.01
9999
53
PID display gain analog value
0 to 300.0%
0.1%
100%
53
Parameter copy alarm release
10/100
1
10/100 *1
63
PU buzzer control
0, 1
1
1
63
PU contrast adjustment
0 to 63
1
58
63
Fault initiation
16 to 18, 32 to 34, 48, 49,
64, 80 to 82, 96, 97, 112,
128, 129, 144, 145, 160,
161, 176 to 179,
192 to 194, 196 to 199,
208, 230, 241, 245 to 247,
253, 9999
1
9999
63
997
—
 998
IPM parameter initialization
0, 1, 12, 22, 32, 101, 112,
122, 132
1
0
92
—
 999
Automatic parameter setting
10, 11, 20, 21, 30, 31, 9999
1
9999
63
Pr.CL
Parameter clear
0, 1
1
0
63
ALLC
All parameter clear
0, 1
1
0
63
Er.CL
Faults history clear
0, 1
1
0
63
—
—
—
—
PCPY
Pr.CH
IPM
AUTO
Parameter copy
0, 1, 2, 3
1
0
63
Initial value change list
—
—
—
63
IPM parameter initialization
0, 1, 12, 22, 32
1
0
92
Automatic parameter setting
—
—
—
63
*1
*2
Differ according to capacities. (55K or lower / 75K or higher)
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Motor
—
Clear
parameters
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
Features
893
Connection
example
62
Rated inverter
current
Standard
Specifications
100%
0.01/
0.1kW *1
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
0.1%
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
30 to 150%
Energy saving monitor reference (motor
capacity)
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Load factor
Parameter
List
892
Explanations
of
Parameters
45
1
Protective
Functions
9999
0 to 4, 9999
Options
Refer to page
Instructions
Initial Value
IPM
motor control
Calibration parameters
PID operation
Increments
Cumulative power monitor digit shifted
times
C5
(904) *2
C6
(904) *2
126
(905) *2
C7
(905) *2
C42
(934) *2
C43
(934) *2
PU
Setting Range
891
895
896
897
898
899
C0
(900) *2
C1
(901) *2
C2
(902) *2
C3
(902) *2
125
(903) *2
C4
(903) *2
—
Name
Compatibility
Parameters
IWarranty
Energy saving monitor
Function
38
Explanations of Parameters
In the following section, the following marks indicate the operable controls:
V/F
............ V/F control (general-purpose motor), S MFVC ............. Simple magnetic flux vector control,
IPM
............ IPM motor control (dedicated IPM motor). (Parameters without any marks are valid for all controls.)
Also the following marks indicate parameter types:
.................. Simple mode parameters,
Pr. 0 Pr.
Pr.
................................... Extended parameters
Manual torque boost
46
Pr.0 Torque boost
Pr.46 Second torque boost
 Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted to the
load to increase the starting motor torque.
 The starting torque boost can be changed by switching terminal RT.
 When simple magnetic flux vector control is selected in Pr. 80, the
settings of Pr. 0 and Pr. 46 are invalid.
Pr.0 Initial
Value
100%
Output
voltage
Setting
range
0
Pr. 1, 2
Pr.
Output
frequency
(Hz)
18
Base
frequency
0.75K
1.5K to 3.7K
5.5K, 7.5K
11K to 37K
45K, 55K
75K or
higher
When using
the constant
torque motor
6%
4%
3%
2%
1.5%


2%*


1%

You can limit the motor speed.
 Clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency.
 To operate at a frequency higher than the Pr.1 setting, adjust the
upper output frequency limit with Pr.18.
(When Pr. 18 is set, Pr. 1 automatically switches to the frequency
of Pr. 18. When Pr. 1 is set, Pr. 18 is automatically changed to the
frequency set in Pr. 1.)
Output frequency
(Hz)
Clamped at the
maximum frequency
Pr.2
Frequency setting
0
(4mA)
5, 10V
(20mA)
Pr.19
Output frequency
(Hz)
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6 Pr.
24 to 27, 232 to 239
Multi-speed setting operation
Pr.4 Multi-speed setting (high speed)
Pr.5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed)
Pr.6 Multi-speed setting (low speed)
Pr.24 Multi-speed setting (speed 4)
Pr.26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6)
Pr.232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8)
Pr.234 Multi-speed setting (speed 10)
Pr.236 Multi-speed setting (speed 12)
Pr.238 Multi-speed setting (speed 14)
Pr.25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5)
Pr.27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7)
Pr.233 Multi-speed setting (speed 9)
Pr.235 Multi-speed setting (speed 11)
Pr.237 Multi-speed setting (speed 13)
Pr.239 Multi-speed setting (speed 15)
Can be used to change the preset speed in the parameter with
the contact signals.
Any speed can be selected by merely turning on-off the contact
signals (RH, RM, RL, REX signals).
 The inverter operates at frequencies set in Pr. 4 when RH signal is
on, Pr. 5 when RM signal is on and Pr. 6 when RL signal is on.
 Frequency from speed 4 to speed 15 can be set according to the
combination of the RH, RM, RL and REX signals. Set the running
frequencies to Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239. (In the initial value
setting, speed 4 to 15 are unavailable.)
Output frequency (Hz)
Clamped at the
minimum frequency
Pr.47 Second V/F (base frequency)
Pr.3
Pr.47
Pr.2 Minimum frequency
Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency
Pr.1
Pr.18
Pr.19 Base frequency voltage
 Used to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to the motor rating.
 When operating a standard motor, generally set the rated frequency of
the motor to Pr. 3 Base frequency. When running the motor using
commercial power supply-inverter switch-over operation, set Pr. 3 to
the same value as the power supply frequency.
 When you want to change the base frequency when switching multiple
motors with one inverter, use the Pr. 47 Second V/F (base frequency).
 Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage (e.g. rated
motor voltage).
* If the initial set Pr. 71 value
is changed to the setting
for use with a constanttorque motor, the Pr. 0
setting changes to the
corresponding value in
above.
Maximum/minimum
frequency
Pr.1 Maximum frequency
Base frequency,
voltage V/F
19, 47
Pr.3 Base frequency
You can compensate for a voltage drop in the low-frequency region
to improve motor torque reduction in the low-speed region.
Pr.0
Pr.46
Pr. 3 Pr.
V/F
Output voltage (V)
Pr.
RH
RM
RL
REX
Speed 1
(High speed)
Speed 10
Speed 5
Speed 11
Speed 2
Speed 6 Speed 9
Speed 12
(Middle speed)
Speed 13
Speed 3 Speed 4
Speed 8
Speed 14
(Low speed)
Speed 7
Speed 15
Time
ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
*
*
39
When turning RH, RM and RL off and REX on with "9999" set in Pr. 232
"multi speed setting (8 speed), the inverter operates at frequency set in
Pr. 6.
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Pr.20
(60Hz)
Output
frequency (Hz)
Running
frequency
Pr.21
Setting
0
(initial
value)
Time
Deceleration Pr.8
i
1
Increments:
0.1s
Range:
0 to 3600s
Increments:
0.01s
Range:
0 to 360s
Increments and
setting range of
acceleration/
deceleration
time setting can
be changed.
 Acceleration/deceleration time changes when the RT signal turns
ON or the output frequency reaches the Pr. 147 setting or higher.
Pr.
10 to 12
DC injection brake of general-purpose
motor control V/F S MFVC
Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time
Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage
Output
frequency (Hz)
Set frequency
Pr.147 setting
The DC injection brake can be operated at a motor stop to adjust
the stop timing and braking torque.
Time
Slope set
by Pr.44
Acceleration time
Slope set
by Pr.44
(Pr.45)
Slope set
by Pr.8
Deceleration time
Output
frequency (Hz)
 If torque is required in the low-speed range (rated motor
frequency (Refer to page 93)/10) under IPM motor control, set the
Pr.791 Acceleration time in low-speed range and Pr.792 Deceleration
time in low-speed range settings higher than the Pr.7 Acceleration
time and Pr.8 Deceleration time settings so that the slow
acceleration/deceleration is performed in the low-speed range.
Low-speed range
(rated motor frequency/10)
Acceleration time
Slope set by Pr.7
Deceleration time
Slope set by Pr.8
Time
Deceleration time
in low-speed range
Slope set by Pr.792
DC injection
brake
voltage
Time
Pr.12
Operation
voltage
Time
Pr. 11 Operation time
Pr.
When
Using the
Mitsubish
Pr.12 Initial Value
Constant
Torque
Motor

3.7K or lower 4%
5.5K to 7.5K 4%
2% *

11K to 55K
2%

75K or higher 1%
When
Using
the
Energy
Saving
Motor

3%


* If the Pr. 71 initial value is changed to
the setting for use with a constanttorque motor, the Pr. 12 setting
changes to the corresponding value
in the above table.
10, 11
DC injection brake of IPM motor control
IPM
Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time
At a motor stop, DC injection brake operates to apply braking
torque to the motor.
Operation example when DC injection
brake is exercised (Pr. 11 0)
Output
frequency
Operation example when DC injection
brake is not exercised (Pr. 11 = 0)
Output
frequency
(Hz)
DC injection brake
is exercised at 0Hz.
Time
Pr. 10
Coasting frequency
time
Time
(Hz)
Motor coasting
Time
DC injection
brake
Pr. 11 Operation time
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Connection
example
Standard
Specifications
Motor
Slope set
by Pr.7
Acceleration time
in low-speed range
Slope set by Pr.791
Features
external thermal relays.)
Pr. 10 Operation
frequency
Acceleration Pr.7
Description
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time.
Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a smaller
value for a faster speed increase/decrease.
 Use Pr. 7 Acceleration time to set the acceleration time required to
reach Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency from 0Hz.
 Use Pr. 8 Deceleration time to set the deceleration time required to
stop from the Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.
 This function detects the overload (overheat) of the motor, stops the
operation of the inverter's output transistor, and stops the output.
 Set the rated current [A] of the motor in Pr.9.
(If the general-purpose motor has both 50Hz and 60Hz ratings and
the Pr.3 Base frequency is set to 60Hz, set the 1.1 times of the 60Hz
rated motor current.)
 When using a motor with an external thermal relay, etc., set “0” in Pr.
9 to make the electronic thermal relay function invalid. (Note that
the output transistor protection of the inverter (E.THT) functions.)
 When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor
1) Set “1” in Pr.71 .
(This provides a 100% continuous torque characteristic in the
low-speed range.)
2) Set the rated motor current in Pr. 9.
 When the RT signal is ON in a general-purpose motor operation,
thermal protection is provided based on the Pr. 51 setting.
Use this function when rotating two motors of different rated currents
individually by a single inverter. (When rotating two motors together, use
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
IPM
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Pr.792 Deceleration time in low-speed range
S MFVC
Parameter
List
IPM
V/F
Set the current of the electronic overcurrent protection to protect
the motor from overheat.This feature provides the optimum
protective characteristics, including reduced motor cooling
capability, at low speed.
Explanations
of
Parameters
Pr.791 Acceleration time in low-speed range
Pr.51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay
Protective
Functions
Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency
Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments Pr.44 Second acceleration/deceleration time
Pr.45 Second deceleration time
Pr.147 Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay
Options
Pr.8 Deceleration time
Motor protection from overheat
(electronic thermal relay function)
Instructions
Pr.7 Acceleration time
51
DC injection
brake
Time
IPM
motor control
Acceleration/deceleration time setting
Pr. 9 Pr.
Compatibility
20, 21, 44, 45, 147, 791, 792
Warranty
Pr.
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr. 7, 8
40
Pr.
Starting frequency
13, 571
Pr.
S MFVC
V/F
Pr.13 Starting frequency
Pr.571 Holding time at a start
You can set the starting frequency and hold the set starting
frequency for a certain period of time.
Set these functions when you need the starting torque or want
smooth motor drive at a start.
Pr.15 Jog frequency
Setting range
Output
frequency(Hz)
Pr.20
Pr.15
Jog frequency
setting range
Pr. 13
0
Pr. 571 setting time
Pr.16
JOG signal
Forward
rotation STF
IPM
ON
ON
Reverse
rotation STR
Pr.13 Starting frequency
Set the frequency where the motor starts running.
Set the deadband in the low-speed range to eliminate noise and
offset deviation when setting a frequency with analog input.
Output
frequency
(Hz)
Pr.
17
ON
Logic selection of output stop
signal (MRS)
Pr.17 MRS input selection
60
Set
frequency
Output
frequency
Pr. 13
0
Forward rotation
*
The inverter output can be shut off by the MRS signal. The logic
of the MRS signal can also be selected.
When Pr. 17 is set to "4", the MRS signal from external terminal
(output stop) can be changed to the normally closed (NC
contact) input, and the MRS signal from communication can be
changed to the normally open (NO contact) input.
Motor coasts
to stop
Time
14
Pr. 14 Load pattern selection
You can select the optimum output characteristic (V/F
characteristic) for the application and load characteristics.
Pr.14 = 0
Output voltage
100%
Pr.3 Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.14 = 1
Output voltage
100%
 For constant-torque load (setting
"0")
 At or less than the base
frequency voltage, the output
voltage varies linearly with the
output frequency.
 Set this value when driving the
load whose load torque is
constant if the speed varies,
e.g. conveyor, cart or roll
drive.
Setting value "2"
Output
stop
Time
MRS signal
ON
STF (STR)
signal
ON
Pr. 18
Refer to the section about Pr.1, Pr.2
Pr. 19
Refer to the section about Pr. 3
Pr. 20, 21
 For variable-torque load (setting
"1", initial value)
 At or less than the base
frequency voltage, the output
voltage varies with the output
frequency in a square curve.
 Set this value when driving the
load whose load torque varies
in proportion to the square of
Pr.3 Base frequency
the speed, e.g. fan or pump.
Output frequency (Hz)
41
(Initial
value)
Inverter
MRS
SD (PC)
V/F pattern matching applications
V/F
Setting value "0"
Output
stop
ON
* Output from 0.01Hz
Pr.
Time
Reverse
rotation
Time
Minimum motor rotation frequency
Setting
range
Forward
rotation
ON
STF
13
Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time
You can set the frequency and acceleration/decelertion time for
jog operation. Jog operation can be performed from either the
outside or PU.
Can be used for conveyor positioning, test operation, etc.
Output
frequency
(Hz)
60
Pr.
Jog operation
15, 16
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Refer to the section about Pr.7, Pr.8
Inverter
MRS
SD (PC)
0 (initial value)
Operation
Second stall prevention function is not activated
The second stall prevention function is performed
according to the RT signal.
RT signal on ....... Stall level Pr. 48
RT signal off ....... Stall level Pr. 22
9999
 Under general-purpose motor control, setting Pr.154 can further
prevent inverter trips (E.OC, E.OV) during stall prevention
operation.
 Stall prevention operation and fast response current restriction
function can be restricted according to the operation condition
using Pr. 156.
(The fast-response current limit operation is disabled under IPM
motor control.)
Refer to the section about Pr.4 to Pr.6
Pr. 24 to 27
Pr.
28
Input compensation of
speed and remote setting
multi-
Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selection
By inputting the frequency setting compensation signal (terminal
1, 2), the speed (frequency) can be compensated for relative to
the multi-speed setting or the speed setting by remote setting
function.
Pr. 28 Setting
0 (initial value)
1
Definition
Without compensation
Features
Connection
example
Pr. 48
used
If the output frequency is less than the frequency set in
0.01Hz to 400Hz Pr. 49, the second stall prevention operation function is
activated. (during constant speed or deceleration)
With compensation
Stall prevention operation level
as set in Pr. 23
400Hz
Output frequency (Hz)
Warranty
 Setting "9999" in Pr. 49 Second stall prevention operation frequency
and turning the RT signal on make Pr. 48 Second stall prevention
operation current valid.
IPM
motor control
When Pr. 23 = "9999", the stall prevention
operation level is as set in Pr. 22 to 400Hz.
Pr. 66
Pr. 22
used
Pr. 48
used
Pr. 49 Setting
When Pr. 23 = 9999
Stall prevention operation
level (%)
Pr. 22
Pr. 22
used
Motor
 Stall prevention
If the output current exceeds the limit value, the output frequency
of the inverter is automatically varied to reduce the output current.
Also the second stall prevention function can restrict the output
frequency range in which the stall prevention function is valid.
(Pr.49)
 Fast-response current limit
If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is
shut off to prevent an overcurrent. (V/F control and Simple
magnetic flux vector control)
 For Pr. 22, set the output current level where the stall prevention is
activated. Set the output current level in ratio to the inverter rated
current (rated IPM motor current under IPM motor control).
Normally set this parameter to120% (initial value).
 When “9999” is set in Pr. 22, stall prevention operation level can
be changed by the signal to the auxiliary input terminal (terminal
1). For the adjustment of bias/gain of analog signal, use Pr. 148
and Pr. 149.
 When a general-purpose motor is driven at the rated motor
frequency or higher, acceleration may not be possible because
the motor current does not increase. If operation is performed in a
high frequency range, the current at motor lockup becomes
smaller than the rated output current of the inverter, and the
protective function (OL) is not executed if the motor is at a stop.
To improve the operating characteristics of the motor in this case,
the stall prevention level can be reduced in the high frequency
region. This function is effective for performing operation up to the
high speed region on a centrifugal separator etc. Normally, set
60Hz in Pr. 66 and 100% in Pr. 23.
 Setting Pr. 23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at
double speed = "9999" (initial value) during general-purpose motor
operation keeps the stall prevention operation level at the Pr. 22
setting until the frequency goes up to 400Hz.
Time
Time
Stall
prevention
level
Standard
Specifications
This function monitors the output current and automatically
changes the output frequency to prevent the inverter from
coming to an alarm stop due to overcurrent, overvoltage, etc. It
can also limit stall prevention and fast-response current limit
operation
during
acceleration/deceleration,
driving
or
regeneration.
Output
frequency
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
S MFVC
V/F
Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation
Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection
Pr.157 OL signal output timer
Pr.49
Set
frequency
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
S MFVC
V/F
Pr.66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency
Pr.148 Stall prevention level at 0V input Pr.149 Stall prevention level at 10V input
Set
frequency
Pr.49
Output
frequency (Hz)
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
S MFVC
V/F
Pr.23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed
Pr.48 Second stall prevention operation current
Pr.49 Second stall prevention operation frequency
Output
frequency
Parameter
List
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level
Set frequency is Pr. 49 or less
Explanations
of
Parameters
Output
frequency (Hz)
Protective
Functions
Set frequency exceeds Pr. 49
Options
Stall prevention operation
Instructions
22, 23, 48, 49, 66, 148, 149, 154, 156, 157
Compatibility
Pr.
 The stall prevention operation level from 0Hz to the output
frequency set in Pr. 49 can be set in Pr. 48.
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
42
Pr.
29, 140 to 143
Acceleration/ deceleration pattern and backlash measures
Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection
Pr.141 Backlash acceleration stopping time
Pr.143 Backlash deceleration stopping time
Pr.140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency
Pr.142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency
You can set the acceleration/deceleration pattern suitable for
application.
You can also set the backlash measures that stop acceleration/
deceleration once at the parameter-set frequency and time during acceleration/deceleration.
Output frequency
(Hz)
Setting value "0"
[Linear acceleration
/ deceleration]
Time
Output frequency
(Hz)
Setting value "1"
[S-pattern acceleration
/deceleration A]
fb
Time
Setting value "2"
Set frequency
(Hz)
[S-pattern acceleration
/deceleration B]
Output frequency
(Hz)
f1
Output frequency (Hz)
f2
Time
Setting value "3"
[Anti-backlash measure
function]
Pr. 142
Pr. 140
Pr. 13
Pr. 141
Pr. 143
 Linear acceleration/deceleration
(setting "0", initial value)
 When the frequency is changed for
acceleration, deceleration, etc. in
inverter operation, the output
frequency is changed linearly (linear
acceleration/deceleration) to reach
the set frequency without straining
the motor and inverter.
 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A
(setting "1")
 For machine tool spindle
applications, etc.
Use when acceleration/deceleration
must be made in a short time to a
high-speed region of not lower than
base frequency.
 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B
(setting "2")
 For prevention of load shifting in
conveyor and other applications
Since acceleration/deceleration is
always made in an S shape from
current frequency (f2) to target
frequency (f1), this function eases
shock produced at acceleration/
deceleration and is effective for load
collapse prevention, etc.
 Backlash measures (setting "3", Pr.140
to Pr.143 )
 To avoid backlash, acceleration/
deceleration is temporarily stopped.
Set the acceleration/deceleration
stopping frequency and time in
Pr.140 to Pr. 143.
Pr.
Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty *
 When making frequent starts/stops, use the optional brake unit
(FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU, MT-BU5) to increase the regenerative
brake duty.
 Use a power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) or power
regeneration converter (MT-RC) for continuous operation in
regenerative status.
Use a high power factor converter (FR-HC2) to reduce harmonics,
improve the power factor, or continuously use the regenerative
mode.
 You can select DC feeding mode 1, which operates with DC
power supply (terminal P/+, N/-), or DC feeding mode 2, which
normally operates with AC power supply (terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/
L3) and with DC power supply such as battery at power failure
occurrence.
<55K or lower>
Power Supply to the
Inverter
Regeneration Unit
Inverter without regenerative
function,
brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU)
Pr. 30
Setting
0
(initial value)
P/+, N/10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 - P/+, N/20
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
High power factor converter (FRHC2), power regeneration common P/+, N/converter (FR-CV)
2
<75K or higher>
Regeneration Unit
Power Supply to
the Inverter
Pr. 30
Setting
Brake unit (FR-BU2)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
P/+, N/R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 / P/+,
N/-
1
11
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
1*
Brake unit (MT-BU5)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
P/+, N/R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 - P/+,
N/-
1*
11*
High power factor
converter (FR-HC2)
P/+, N/-
* Setting can be made for the 75K or higher.
Time
S MFVC
Setting value "6"
[Variable-torque
acceleration/deceleration]
Setting
frequency
Pr.3
Base frequency
Time
Pr.7 Acceleration time Pr.8 Deceleration time
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Pr. 70
Setting*
—
21
Power regeneration
converter (MT-RC)
 This function is useful for variable-torque load such as a fan and
blower to accelerate/decelerate in short time.
In areas where output frequency > base frequency, the speed
accelerates/decelerates linearly.
43
Selection of
regeneration unit
Pr.30 Regenerative function selection
 Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 = "6")
V/F
30, 70
0%
(initial
value)
10%
21*
2
—
.
 If the set frequency is considered as 100%, output frequency can
be adjusted between 1% and 100% with Pr. 41.
 This parameter can be used to ensure that the running frequency
has been reached to provide the operation start signal etc. for
related equipment.
Set frequency
You can change the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) monitor
display or frequency setting to motor speed or machine speed.
 When the running speed monitor is selected, each monitor and
setting are determined according to the combination of Pr. 37 and
Pr. 144. (The units within the thick frame are the initial values.)
Pr. 37
Setting
0
1 to
9998
*1
*2
*3
Pr. 144
Setting
Output
Frequency
Monitor
Set
Frequency
Monitor
Running
Speed
Monitor
Frequency
Setting
Parameter
Setting
0
Hz
Hz
r/min *1
Hz
2 to 10
Hz
Hz
r/min *1
Hz
102 to
110
r/min *1
r/min *1
r/min *1
r/min *1
0
Hz
Hz
Machine
speed *1
Hz
2 to 10
Machine
speed *1
Machine
speed *1
Machine
speed *1
Machine
speed *1
102 to
110
Hz
Hz
r/min *1
Hz
Motor speed r/min conversion formula
........ Frequency  120/number of motor poles (Pr. 144)
Machine speed conversion formula
...... Pr. 37  frequency/Pr. 505 setting (Hz)
For Pr. 144 in the above formula, the value is “Pr. 144-100” when “102 to
110” is set in Pr. 144 and the value is “4” when Pr. 37=0 and Pr.144=0.
The increments for Hz are 0.01Hz, machine speed are 1m/min and r/min
are 1r/min
Pr. 505 is always set as frequency (Hz).
Pr.50
Pr.42
Forward
rotation
Time
Pr.43
Pr.50
Reverse
rotation
Output
signal OFF
FU
FU2
OFF
Features
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
ON
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
OFF
OFF
OFF
 Setting a hysteresis width at the output frequency in Pr.870
prevents chattering of the speed detection signals.
Output
frequency
(Hz)
Instructions
Pr.144 Speed setting switchover
Time
Pr.42
Pr.870
Motor
Pr.37 Speed display
Pr.505 Speed setting reference
(Hz)
Speed display and speed
setting
37, 144, 505
SU
Adjustment
range Pr.41
 When the output frequency reaches or exceeds the setting of
Pr.42, the output frequency detection signal (FU) is output.
This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation,
open signal, etc.
 When the detection frequency is set in Pr.43, frequency detection
for reverse rotation use only can also be set. This function is
effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake
operation between forward rotation (rise) and reverse rotation
(fall) during vertical lift operation, etc.
 When outputting a frequency detection signal besides the FU
signal, set the detection frequency to Pr.50. The FU2 signal is
output when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the Pr.50
setting.
Output frequency
Pr.
Output frequency
(Hz)
 Up to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to
either the top or bottom point of each area.
 The value set to 1A, 2A or 3A is a jump point and operation in the
jump zone is performed at these frequencies.
 Frequency jump is not performed if the initial value is set to "9999".
 During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the
set area is valid.
Parameter
List
Pr.32
Pr.31
Connection
example
Pr.34
Pr.33
Standard
Specifications
The inverter output frequency is detected and output at the
output signals.
Explanations
of
Parameters
Set frequency (Hz)
Frequency jump
Pr.36
Pr.35
Protective
Functions
When it is desired to
avoid resonance
attributable to the
natural frequency of a
mechanical system,
these parameters allow
resonant frequencies to
be jumped.
Pr.41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity
Pr.42 Output frequency detection
Pr.43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation
Pr.50 Second output frequency detection
Pr.870 Speed detection hysteresis
Options
Pr.32 Frequency jump 1B
Pr.34 Frequency jump 2B
Pr.36 Frequency jump 3B
Detection of output frequency
41 to 43, 50, 870 (SU, FU, FU2 signal)
FB
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Example of output frequency detection signal (FB)
Pr. 44, 45
Refer to the section about Pr.7, Pr.8
Pr. 46
Refer to the section about Pr. 0
Pr. 47
Refer to the section about Pr. 3
Pr. 48, 49
Refer to the section about Pr. 22
Pr. 50
Refer to the section about Pr. 41
Pr. 51
Refer to the section about Pr. 9
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
IPM
motor control
Pr.31 Frequency jump 1A
Pr.33 Frequency jump 2A
Pr.35 Frequency jump 3A
Pr.
Compatibility
31 to 36
Warranty
Pr.
Avoid mechanical resonance
points (frequency jump)
44
Pr.
*1
*2
52, 54, 158, 170, 171, 268, 563, 564, 891
Change of DU/PU monitor descriptions
Cumulative monitor clear
Pr.52 DU/PU main display data selection Pr.54 FM terminal function selection
Pr.158 AM terminal function selection Pr.170 Watt-hour meter clear
Pr.171 Operation hour meter clear
Pr.268 Monitor decimal digits selection
Pr.563 Energization time carrying-over times
Pr.564 Operating time carrying-over times
Pr.891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times
*4
*5
*6
The monitor to be displayed on the main screen of the operation
panel (FR-DU07)/parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be
selected.
 By setting “0” in Pr. 170, the cumulative power monitor can be
cleared.
 You can check the numbers of cumulative energization time
monitor exceeded 65535h with Pr. 563 and the numbers of actual
operation time monitor exceeded 65535h with Pr. 564.
 Writing "0" in Pr. 171 clears the actual operation time monitor.
Pr.52 Parameter
Setting Value
Types of Monitor
Output frequency
Output current
Increments
0.01Hz
0.01A/
0.1A*6
Pr.54
(FM)
Full Scale
Pr.158
Value
DU
PU main (AM)
LED
monitor Setting
0/100
1
Pr.55
0/100
2
0.1V
0/100
3
Alarm display
Frequency setting

0.01Hz
0/100
5
*1

5
Running speed
1(r/min)
6
*1
6
Converter output
voltage
0.1V
8
*1
8
Regenerative brake
duty *5
0.1%
9
*1
9
Output voltage
Electronic thermal
relay function load
factor
Output current peak
value
Converter output
voltage peak value
Input power
Output power
Input terminal status
Output terminal
status
Option input
terminal status
Option output
terminal status
Load meter
Reference voltage
output
Cumulative
energization time *2
Actual operation
time *2, 3
Motor load factor
Cumulative power
Power saving effect
Cumulative saving
power
PID set point
PID measured value
PID deviation value
45
*3
Selected by the parameter unit(FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are
accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again
from 0.
When the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used, up to 65.53 (65530h) is
displayed as 1h=0.001 and then accumulated from 0.
The actual operation time is not added up if the cumulative operation time
before power supply-off is less than 1h.
When using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), “kW” is displayed.
Setting can be made for the 75K or higher.
The setting depends on the inverter capacity.(55K or lower/75K or higher)
0.1%
10
*1
10
0.01A/
0.1A*6
11
*1
11
0.1V
12
*1
12
0.01kW/
0.1kW*6
0.01kW/
0.1kW*6


200V
class : 400V
400V
class : 800V

Pr.55
Value of Pr. 55
represented in
terms of Pr. 37
value
200V
class : 400V
400V
class : 800V
Brake duty set
in Pr. 30 and
Pr. 70
Electronic
thermal relay
function
operation level
Pr.56
13
*1
13
14
*1
14
*1

*1



56




57



0.1%

17

17

Pr. 268 Setting
9999 (initial value)
Pr.56
200V
class : 400V
400V
class : 800V
Rated inverter
power  2
Rated inverter
power  2

55
 The cumulative power monitor value digit can be shifted to the
right by the number set in Pr. 891.
Pr.56
21

1h
20


1h
23


0.1%
0.01kWh/
0.1kWh *4, *6
24
24
25

Variable
according
to
parameters
50
50
51

0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
52
53
54
52
53

Description
No function
0
When 1 or 2 decimal places (0.1 increments or 0.01
increments) are monitored, the decimal places are
dropped and the monitor displays an integer value (1
increments).
The monitor value of 0.99 or less is displayed as 0.
1
When 2 decimal places (0.01 increments) are
monitored, the 0.01 decimal place is dropped and the
monitor displays the first decimal place (0.1
increments).
When the monitor display digit is originally in 1
increments, it is displayed unchanged in 1
increments.
 When Pr. 52 is set to "100", the set frequency monitor is displayed
during a stop and the output frequency monitor is displayed during
operation. (LED of Hz flickers during stop and is lit during
operation.)
Pr.52
0
During
operation/stop
Output
frequency
Output
current
Output
voltage
Alarm
display
Pr.
100
Output frequency
During stop
During
running
Set frequency
Output frequency
Output current
Output voltage
Alarm display
55, 56, 867
Change of the monitor output
from terminal FM and AM
Pr.55 Frequency monitoring reference
Pr.867 AM output filter
Pr.56 Current monitoring reference
For Pr. 55, set a full-scale value for outputting the output current
monitor value to the terminal FM or AM.
Set the full-scale value to output the output current monitor value
to terminal FM and AM in Pr. 56.
Pulse speed(terminal FM)
200%

Inverter
capacity

100%
100%

Output voltage(terminal AM)
2400
pulse/s
10VDC
1440
pulse/s
Output frequency
reference
Output current
reference
Pr.55
400Hz
Pr.56
500A
Pr.55
Pr.56
400Hz
500A
 Using Pr. 867 , the output voltage response of the terminal AM can
be adjusted within the range 0 to 5s.
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Instantaneous (power failure) time
Motor
speed N (r/min)
Coasting
time (Pr. 57)
Speed
detection time
Description
* The output shut off timing differs
according to the load condition.
1.5K or lower .......0.5s,
Acceleration time
at a restart
(Pr. 611 setting)
2.2K to 7.5K.........1s,
11K to 55K ..........3.0s
57
0.1 to 5s/
0.1 to 30s *
58
9999 (initial value)
0 to 60s
0 (initial value)
1
162
10
11
163
0 to 20s
164
0 to 100%
165
0 to 150%
0
1
299
9999
(initial value)
0 to 3600s
611
9999
 When Pr.162 = "1" or "11", automatic restart operation is
performed in a reduced voltage system, where the voltage is
gradually risen with the output frequency unchanged from prior to
an instantaneous power failure independently of the coasting
speed of the motor.
The setting range varies according to the inverter capacity. (55K or lower/
75K or higher)
When Pr.162 = 1, 11 (without frequency search)
Instantaneous (power failure) time
Power supply
(R/L1,S/L2,T/L3)
Motor speed N
(r/min)
Inverter
output frequency
f (Hz)
Inverter
output voltage
E (V)
*
Coasting time
Pr. 57 setting
Restart cushion
time
Pr. 58 setting
* The output shut off timing differs according
to the load condition.
MC2
MCCB
MC1
R/L1 U
S/L2 V
T/L3 W
R1/L11
S1/L21
STF
CS
SD
CS
SD
MC3
M
MC
switchover
sequence
Keep the CS signal ON
during the automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure
or when using only the flying start function.
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Compatibility
IPM
motor control
<Connection diagram>
Warranty
*
75K or higher ......5.0s
The above times are coasting time.
Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered
restart after an instantaneous power
failure.
No restart
Set a voltage starting time at restart.
With frequency search
Reduced voltage start only at the first
start (no frequency search)
Frequency search at every start
Reduced voltage start at every start (no
frequency search)
Set a voltage starting time at restart.
Consider using these parameters
according to the load (inertia moment,
torque) magnitude.
Consider the rated inverter current as
100% and set the stall prevention
operation level during restart operation.
Without rotation direction detection
With rotation direction detection
When Pr. 78 =0, the rotation direction is
detected.
When Pr. 78 =1,2, the rotation direction is
not detected.
Set the acceleration time that takes to
reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency setting at a restart.
Acceleration time for restart is the normal
acceleration time (e.g. Pr. 7).
Explanations
of
Parameters
0
Features
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
+
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
Setting
Range
Inverter output
voltage E (V)
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Pr.
Number
*
Inverter output
frequency f (Hz)
 when commercial power supply operation is switched to inverter
operation
 when power comes back on after an instantaneous power failure
 when motor is coasting at start
For the operation under IPM motor control, refer to the next page.
Parameter
List
The inverter can be restarted without stopping the motor under
V/F control and Simple magnetic flux vector control in the
following cases:
Standard
Specifications
Power supply
(R/L1,S/L2,T/L3)
Connection
example
When Pr.162 = 0, 10 (with frequency search)
Protective
Functions
Pr.57 Restart coasting time
Pr.58 Restart cushion time
Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection
Pr.163 First cushion time for restart
Pr.164 First cushion voltage for restart Pr.165 Stall prevention operation level for restart
Pr.299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting
Pr.611 Acceleration time at a restart
Options
Automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure/flying start under generalpurpose motor control
Instructions
57, 58, 162 to 165, 299, 611
Motor
Pr.
 When “0 (initial value) or 10” is set in Pr. 162, the inverter smoothly
starts after detecting the motor speed upon power restoration.
 Even when the motor is rotating in the opposite direction, the
inverter can be restarted smoothly as the direction of rotation is
detected. (You can select whether to make rotation direction
detection or not with Pr.299 Rotation direction detection selection at
restarting. )
46
Pr.
Pr.
57, 162, 611
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start under IPM motor control
IPM
Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection
Pr.57 Restart coasting time
Pr.611 Acceleration time at a restart
The inverter can be restarted without stopping the IPM motor in
the following cases:
 When power comes back ON during inverter driving after an
instantaneous power failure
 When the motor is coasting at start
For V/F control and Simple magnetic flux vector control, refer to
the previous page.
Pr.
Number
Setting
Range
Description
0
57
No waiting time
Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered
restart after an instantaneous power
failure.
0.1 to 5s/
0.1 to 30s *
9999
(initial value)
0 (initial value), 1
10, 11
No restart
With frequency search
162
Frequency search at every start
Set the acceleration time that takes to
reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration
0 to 3600s
reference frequency setting at a restart.
611
Acceleration time for restart is the normal
9999
acceleration time (e.g. Pr. 7).
* Differ according to capacities. (55K or lower/75K or higher)
Pr.59 Remote function selection
 Even if the operation panel is located away from the enclosure,
you can use contact signals to perform continuous variable-speed
operation, without using analog signals.
 By merely setting this parameter, you can use the acceleration,
deceleration and setting clear functions of the motorized speed
setter (FR-FK).
Description
Power supply
(R/L1,S/L2,T/L3)
RH, RM, RL
signal
function
0 (initial
value)
Multi-speed
setting


1
Remote setting
Used
Disabled
2
Remote setting
Not used
Disabled
3
Remote setting
Not used
(Turning STF/STR off
clears remotely-set
frequency.)
Disabled
11
12
Remote setting
Used
Enabled
Remote setting
Not used
Enabled
Remote setting
Not used
(Turning STF/STR
OFF clears remotelyset frequency.)
Enabled
13
Frequency
setting storage
function
Output frequency
(Hz)
When Pr. 59 = 1, 2, 11, 12 When Pr. 59 = 1, 11
When Pr. 59 = 3, 13
When Pr. 59 = 2, 3, 12, 13
*
0Hz
Time
ON
ON
Acceleration
(RH)
Deceleration
(RM)
Clear (RL)
Forward
rotation (STF)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Power supply
Motor
speed N (r/min)
Deceleration to
the frequency
lower than the
set frequency
Pr.59
Setting
 Automatic restart operation selection (Pr.162)
The inverter smoothly starts after detecting the motor speed
(frequency search) upon power restoration.
During reverse rotation, the inverter can be restarted smoothly as
the direction of rotation is detected.
Instantaneous (power failure) time
Remote setting function
59
ON
ON
* External running frequency (other than multi-speed operation) or PU
running frequency
*
Inverter output
frequency f (Hz)
Pr. 60 Energy saving control selection
Inverter output
voltage E (V)
V/F
Pr.60 Energy saving control
Coasting
time (Pr. 57)
+
Speed
detection time
* The output shut off timing differs
according to the load condition.
Acceleration time
at a restart
(Pr. 611 setting)
Without a fine parameter setting, the inverter automatically
performs energy saving operation.
This inverter is optimum for fan and pump applications.
Pr. 60 Setting
0 (initial value)
4
9
47
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Description
Normal operation mode
Energy saving operation mode
In the energy saving operation mode, the inverter
automatically controls the output voltage to minimize
the inverter output voltage during a constant operation.
Optimum excitation control mode
The optimum excitation control mode is a control
system which controls excitation current to improve the
motor efficiency to maximum and determines output
voltage as an energy saving system.

E.OV1

E.OV2
E.OV3





















E.THM

E.THT

E.IPF


E.UVT


E.BE


E. GF


E.OHT


0
(initial
value)
Standard motor (SF-JR, etc.)

1
Mitsubishi constant-torque motor
(SF-HRCA, etc.)
2
Standard motor (SF-JR, etc.)
Adjustable 5 points V/F
20
Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR4P
(1.5kW or lower )
120
High-efficiency IPM motor (MM-EF)

210
Premium high-efficiency IPM motor
(MM-EFS)

2010,
2110



For manufacturer setting (setting not required)
 For the 5.5K and 7.5K, the Pr. 0 Torque boost and Pr. 12 DC injection
brake operation voltage settings are automatically changed
according to the Pr. 71 setting as follows.
Standard Motor Setting Constant Torque Motor Setting
1
0, 2, 20, 120, 210
Pr.71


Pr. 0
3%
2%


Pr. 12
4%
2%
E.OP1


E. PE


E. OS*


E.PTC

E.CDO


E.SER


E.ILF


E.PID

E.SOT*

Pr.


Carrier frequency and SoftPWM selection
 Set the number of retries at alarm occurrence in Pr. 67.
0 (initial value)
Pr.
Number
Description
No retry function
1 to 10
Set the number of retries at alarm occurrence.
An alarm output is not provided during retry
operation.
101 to 110
Set the number of retries at alarm occurrence.
(The setting value of minus 100 is the number
of retries.)
An alarm output is provided during retry operation.
72
240
 Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when an inverter alarm
occurs until a retry is made in the range 0 to 10s.
 Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of
successful restart times made by retry.
Pr. 66
Pr. 67 to 69
Pr. 70
Refer to the section about Pr. 22
Pr.240 Soft-PWM operation selection
Features
Connection
example
You can change the motor sound.

* This function is available only under IPM motor control.
Pr. 67 Setting
72, 240, 260
Pr.72 PWM frequency selection
Pr.260 PWM frequency automatic switchover


Explanations
of
Parameters
E.OLT
E.OPT
Standard
Specifications
E.OC3
5
Outline
Dimension
Drawings

4
IPM
260
Refer to the section about Pr. 65
Refer to the section about Pr. 30
Setting
Range
Description
You can change the PWM carrier frequency. The setting
values indicate [kHz] values during general-purpose
motor control. Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz, 15 indicates
14.5kHz and 25 indicates 2.5kHz.
0 to 15/ Under IPM motor control, the setting values indicate the
0 to 6, 25 following [kHz] values.
"0 to 5": 2kHz
*
"6 to 9": 6kHz
"10 to 13": 10kHz
"14 to 15": 14kHz
Cannot be set to "25".
0
Soft-PWM is invalid
1 (initial When "0 to 5" ("0 to 4" for the 75K or higher) is set in Pr.
value) 72, Soft-PWM is valid
PWM carrier frequency is constant, independent of load.
When the carrier frequency is set to 3kHz or more (Pr.72
0
 "3") during general-purpose control, performs
continuous operation at less than 85% of the rated
inverter current.
Decreases PWM carrier frequency automatically when
load increases.
If continuous operation is performed at 85% of the rated
1 (initial inverter current (the rated current shown in parentheses
on page 8) or higher with inverter carrier frequency set to
value)
3kHz is higher (Pr.72  "3") (6kHz or higher under IPM
motor control (Pr.72  "6")), E.THT (inverter overload
trip) is likely to occur. To avoid that, the carrier frequency
is automatically lowered as low as 2kHz.
* The setting range varies according to the inverter capacity. (55K or lower/
75K or higher).
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Options

E.OC2
3
Constant
torque
Instructions
E.OC1
2
Motor used)
Motor
1
Thermal Characteristic of
the Electronic Thermal
Relay Function
IPM
motor control
0
Pr.71
Setting
Standard
Pr.65 Setting
Alarm Indication
for Retry
Setting of the used motor selects the thermal characteristic
appropriate for the motor.
Setting is necessary when using a constant-torque motor.
Thermal characteristic of the electronic thermal relay function
suitable for the motor is set.
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
 Use Pr. 65 to select the alarm to be activated for retries.
"" indicates the alarms selected for retry.
Pr.71 Applied motor
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
If an alarm occurs, the inverter resets itself automatically to
restart. You can also select the alarm description for a retry.
When selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure is selected (Pr. 57 Restart coasting time  9999), restart
operation is performed at retry operation as at an instantaneous
power failure.
Use the constant torque motor
(applied motor)
Parameter
List
Pr.67 Number of retries at fault occurrence
Pr.69 Retry count display erase
71
Compatibility
Pr.65 Retry selection
Pr.68 Retry waiting time
Pr.
Protective
Functions
Retry function at alarm
occurrence
65, 67 to 69
Warranty
Pr.
48
Pr.
(1) Added compensation (Pr.242, Pr.243)
 A compensation signal can be added to the main speed
setting for synchronous operation, etc.
73, 242, 243, 252, 253, 267
Analog input selection
Output frequency
Pr.252 Override bias
Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection
Output frequency
When voltage across
terminals 2-5 is 2.5V (5V)
When voltage across
terminals 2-5 is 2.5V (5V)
Pr.73 Analog input selection
Pr.242 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 2)
Pr.243 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 4)
When voltage across
terminals 2-5 is 0V
Pr.253 Override gain
-5V -2.5V
(-10V) (-5V)
 You can select the function that switches between forward rotation
and reverse rotation according to the analog input polarity, the
override function and the input signal specifications.
 For the terminals 2, 4 used for analog input, voltage input (0 to 5V,
0 to 10V) or current input (4 to 20mA) can be selected.
 The additional compensation and fixed ratio of analog
compensation (override) using terminal 2 as an auxiliary input can
be made to multi-speed operation or the speed setting signal
(main speed) of the terminal 2 or terminal 4.
(
indicates the main speed setting)
0
+2.5V +5V ··· Terminal 1
(+5V) (+10V)
When voltage
across terminals
2-5 is 0V
-5V -2.5V
(-10V) (-5V)
Forward rotation
0
+2.5V
(+5V)
+5V ··· Terminal 1
(+10V)
Reverse rotation Forward rotation
STF-SD
When ON
STF-SD
When ON
Reverse rotation
Forward rotation
(a) When the Pr. 73 setting is 0 to 5
Forward rotation
(b)When the Pr. 73 setting is 10 to 15
 The terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) signal is added
to the main speed setting signal of the terminal 2 or 4.
(2) Override function (Pr.252, Pr.253)
 When an override is selected, the terminal 1 or 4 is used for
the main speed setting and the terminal 2 for the override
signal. (When the main speed of the terminal 1 or terminal 4
is not input, compensation by the terminal 2 is invalid.)
Compensation
Input Terminal
Pr. 73 Terminal 2 Terminal 1
and
Terminal 4 Input
Polarity Reversible
Setting
Input
Input
Compensation
Method
17
0
1
(Initial
value)
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
49
Terminal 1
added
compensation
Terminal 2
override
When the AU
signal is off

0 to 20mA 0 to 5V

0 to 10V
0 to 5V


0 to 10V
0 to 5V

0 to 5V
0 to 5V
When the AU
signal is on
0 to 10V According to the
0 to 5V
Pr. 267 setting
(Initial value)
0 to 10V
1:0 to 5V
0 to 10V
2:0 to 10V
0 to 5V
0 to 5V


0 to 10V
0 to 5V
Pr.252
Pr.253
0V
Function
Terminal 1
added
compensation
Not function
(Indicates that
a frequency
command
signal of
negative
polarity is not
accepted. )
2.5V
5V
(5V)
(10V)
Voltage across terminals 2-5
 When an override is selected, the terminal 1 or 4 is used for the
main speed setting and the terminal 2 for the override signal (50%
to 150% at 0 to 5V or 0 to 10V). (When the main speed of the
terminal 1 or 4 is not input, compensation by the terminal 2 is
invalid.)
 When Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level = "9999", the value of
the terminal 1 is as set to the stall prevention operation level.
Pr.
74
Noise elimination at the analog
input
Pr.74 Input filter time constant
Terminal 1
added
compensation
Terminal 2
override
Terminal 1
added
compensation
Initial value
(50% to 150%)
100
0
Terminal 2
override
Terminal 1
added
compensation
Terminal 2
override
150
50
Terminal 1
added
compensation
0 to 10V 0 to 10V
0 to 10V
200
Not function
(Indicates that
a frequency
command
signal of
negative
polarity is not
accepted. )
Override value (%)
0
0 to 10V 0 to 10V
1
0 to 5V 0 to 10V
(Initial
value)
2
0 to 10V 0 to 5V
3
0 to 5V 0 to 5V
4
0 to 10V 0 to 10V
5
0 to 5V 0 to 5V
6
0 to 20mA 0 to 10V
7
0 to 20mA 0 to 5V
10
0 to 10V 0 to 10V
11
0 to 5V 0 to 10V
12
0 to 10V 0 to 5V
13
0 to 5V 0 to 5V
14
0 to 10V 0 to 10V
15
0 to 5V 0 to 5V
16
0 to 20mA 0 to 10V
Function
The time constant of the primary delay filter relative to external
frequency command (analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4) signal) can
be set.
 Valid for eliminating noise of the frequency setting circuit.
 Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be
performed due to noise.
A larger setting results in slower response. (The time constant can
be set between approximately 5ms to 1s with the setting of 0 to 8.)
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Pr.76 Fault code output selection
You can select the reset input acceptance, disconnected PU
(FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) connector detection function
and PU stop function.
At alarm occurrence, its description can be output as a 4-bit
digital signal from the open collector output terminals.
The alarm code can be read by a programmable controller, etc.,
and its corrective action can be shown on a display, etc.
1
Reset input enabled
only when the protective
function is activated.
2
Reset input normally
enabled.
3
Reset input enabled
only when the protective
function is activated.
14
(initial
value)
15
Reset input normally
enabled.
Reset input enabled
only when the protective
function is activated.
16
Reset input normally
enabled.
17
Reset input enabled
only when the protective
function is activated.
If the PU is
disconnected,
operation will be
continued as-is.
When the PU is
disconnected,
the inverter
output is shut
off.
If the PU is
disconnected,
operation will be
continued as-is.
When the PU is
disconnected,
the inverter
output is shut
off.
Pr.76 Setting
0 (initial value)
Pressing
decelerates the
motor to a stop only
in the PU operation
mode.
 Reset selection
 You can select the operation timing of reset function (RES
signal, reset command through communication) input
 Disconnected PU detection
 This function detects that the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FRPU07) has been disconnected from the inverter for longer than
1s and causes the inverter to provide an alarm output (E.PUE)
and come to an alarm stop.
 PU stop selection
 In any of the PU operation, external operation and network
operation modes, the motor can be stopped by pressing
1
With alarm code output (Refer to the following table)
2
Alarm code output at alarm occurrence only (Refer to
the following table)
 The following table indicates alarm codes to be output. (0: output
transistor off, 1: output transistor on)
Operation Panel
Indication
(FR-DU07)
SU
IPF
OL
FU
Normal *
0
0
0
0
0
E.OC1
0
0
0
1
1
E.OC2
0
0
1
0
2
E.OC3
0
0
1
1
3
E.OV1 to E.OV3
0
1
0
0
4
E.THM
0
1
0
1
5
E.THT
0
1
1
0
6
E.IPF
0
1
1
1
7
E.UVT
1
0
0
0
8
E.FIN
1
0
0
1
9
E.BE
1
0
1
0
A
Pressing
decelerates the
motor to a stop in
any of the PU,
external and
communication
operation modes.
Description
Without alarm code output
Output of Output Terminals
Alarm Code
E. GF
1
0
1
1
B
E.OHT
1
1
0
0
C
E.OLT
1
1
0
1
D
E.OPT
1
1
1
0
E
E.OP1
1
1
1
0
E
Other than the
above
1
1
1
1
F
* When Pr. 76 = "2", the output terminals output the signals assigned to Pr.
190 to Pr. 196.
of the PU.
Pr.
77
Prevention of parameter rewrite
Standard
Specifications
Reset input normally
enabled.
PU Stop
Selection
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
0
Disconnected
PU Detection
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
Reset Selection
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Pr.75
Setting
Connection
example
Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection
Features
Output function of alarm code
76
Parameter
List
Pr.
Explanations
of
Parameters
Reset selection, disconnected PU
detection
Protective
Functions
75
Options
Pr.
You can select whether write to various parameters can be
performed or not. Use this function to prevent parameter values
from being rewritten by misoperation.
78
Parameter write is not enabled.
2
Parameter write is enabled in any operation
mode regardless of operation status.
Prevention of reverse rotation of
the motor
Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection
This function can prevent reverse rotation fault resulting from the
incorrect input of the start signal.
Pr.78 Setting
0 (initial value)
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Description
Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
1
Reverse rotation disabled
2
Forward rotation disallowed
Motor
1
IPM
motor control
Pr.
Description
Write is enabled only during a stop
Compatibility
0 (initial value)
Warranty
Pr. 77 Setting
Instructions
Pr.77 Parameter write selection
50
Pr. 79 Pr.
340
Operation mode selection
Pr.79 Operation mode selection Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection
Used to select the operation mode of the inverter.
You can freely change between operation by external signal
(external operation), operation by PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FRPU07) (PU operation), operation by combination of PU operation
and external operation (external/PU combined operation) and network operation (when RS-485 terminals or a communication
option is used).
Pr.79
Setting
Description
LED Indication
:Off
:On
 Specify operation mode at power on (Pr.340)
 When power is switched on or when power comes back on after
instantaneous power failure, the inverter can be started up in the
network operation mode.
After the inverter has started up in the network operation mode,
parameter write and operation can be performed from a program.
Set this mode for communication operation using the inverter RS485 terminals or communication option.
 You can set the operation mode at power on (reset) according
to the Pr. 79 and Pr. 340 settings.
Pr.79
Setting
0
(initial
value)
As set in Pr.79.
PU operation mode
PU
External/PU switchover mode ( Press
0
(initial
value)
to switch between the PU and
external operation mode.)
External operation mode at power-on
EXT
NET
External operation
mode
PU
EXT
EXT
1, 2 *1
Fixed to PU operation mode
2
Fixed to external operation mode
Operation can be performed by switching
between the external and Net operation
mode.
PU
PU
3
4
6
7
Switch-over mode
Switch among PU operation, external
operation, and NET operation while
keeping the same operation status.
External operation mode (PU operation
interlock)
X12 signal ON
Operation mode can be switched to the
PU operation mode.
(output stop during external operation)
X12 signal OFF
Operation mode can not be switched to
the PU operation mode.
EXT
PU operation mode
2
NET operation mode
7
X12(MRS)signal OFF
.. External operation
mode
0
NET operation mode
1
PU operation mode
2
NEToperation mode
External/PU combined
operation mode
Fixed to NET operation mode
Operation mode switching is
disallowed
NET operation mode
Can be switched to PU or
NET operation mode with
operation continued *3
3, 4
External/PU combined
operation mode
NET operation mode
X12 (MRS) signal ON
.. NET operation mode
NET
NET
10, 12
3, 4
*1
6
External/PU
combined
operation mode
PU
EXT
NET
Fixed to external operation
mode (Forcibly switched to
external operation mode.)
The Pr. 340 setting "2" or "12" is mainly used for communication
operation using the inverter RS-485 terminals.
When a value other than "9999" (selection of automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure) is set in Pr. 57 Restart coasting time, the
inverter will resume the same operation state which was in before after
power has been restored from an instantaneous power failure.
The operation mode cannot be switched directly between the PU
operation mode and network operation mode.
Operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and
7
*1
*2
*3
External operation
mode
network operation mode with
EXT
NET
External operation
mode
PU
EXT
EXT
Pr.
NET
NET operation
mode
PU
key of the operation panel (FR-
DU07) and X65 signal.
PU operation mode
PU
Can be switched to external,
PU or NET operation mode *2
Fixed to PU operation mode
Can be switched to external
or NET operation mode
Switching to PU operation
mode disabled
Operation mode switching
disabled
Can be switched to external,
PU or NET operation mode
with operation continued
Can be switched to external,
PU or NET operation mode *2
Fixed to external operation
mode (Forcibly switched to
external operation mode.)
Can be switched to PU or
NET operation mode *3
Fixed to PU operation mode
6
NET operation
mode
EXT
1
NET
External operation
mode
PU
External/PU combined operation mode 1
Running frequency
Start signal
PU (FR-DU07 /
FR-PU04 / FRPU07) setting or
External signal
external signal
input (terminal STF,
input (multi-speed
STR)
setting, across
terminals 4-5 (valid
when AU signal
turns on))
External/PU combined operation mode 2
Running frequency
Start signal
Input from the PU
External signal
(FR-DU07 / FRinput (terminal 2, 4, PU04 / FR-PU07)
1, Jog, multi-speed
setting, etc)
(
,
)
EXT
NET operation mode
NET
PU operation mode
1
0
Operation Mode
Switchover
NET
NET operation
mode
PU
Operation mode at
Power On, Power
Restoration, Reset
Pr. 340
Setting
NET
80, 90
Simple magnetic flux vector
control S MFVC
Pr.80 Regenerative function selection
Pr.90 Motor constant (R1)
Providing optimum excitation to the motor can also produce high
torque in a low-speed region.
 Set the used motor capacity (equal to or one rank higher than the
inveter capacity) in Pr. 80.
The number of motor poles should be any of 2, 4 and 6 poles.
Single-motor operation (one motor for one inverter)
Wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30m.
 When simple magnetic flux vector control is not used, set "9999"
(initial value) in Pr. 80.
 For Pr. 90 Motor constant (R1), normally setting is not necessary.
When you need more torque under simple magnetic flux vector
control for other manufacturer's motor, set the motor primary
resistance value (R1) for
connection in Pr. 90
51
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
1bit
2bit
7bit
Base frequency
voltage
Pr.19
V/F1
V/F2
0
0 to 10
121
335
V/F3
Torque boost
Pr.0
Frequency
9999
Base frequency
V/F Characteristic Pr.3
 Adjustable 5 points V/F will not function under simple magnetic
flux vector control.
 When Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage = "8888" or "9999", Pr. 71 cannot be
set to "2". To set Pr. 71 to "2", set the rated voltage value to Pr. 19
 When the frequency values of the points are the same, a write
inhibit error (
) occurs.
 Set the points (frequencies, voltages) of Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 within
the ranges of Pr. 3 Base frequency and Pr. 19Base frequency voltage .
 When “2” is set in Pr. 71, Pr. 47 Second V/F (base frequency) will not
function.
 When “2” is set in Pr. 71, thermal characteristic of the electronic
thermal relay function changes to thermal characteristics of a
standard motor.
0
122
336
0.1 to 999.8s
9999 (initial value)
123
337
124
341
*1
117 to 124, 331 to 337, 341 to 343, 502, 539, 549, 779
Communication initial setting
Pr.117 PU communication station number Pr.118 PU communication speed
Pr.119 PU communication stop bit length Pr.120 PU communication parity check
Pr.121 Number of PU communication retries Pr.122 PU communication check time interval
Pr.123 PU communication waiting time setting
Pr.124 PU communication CR/LF selection
Pr.331 RS-485 communication station number Pr.332 RS-485 communication speed
Pr.333 RS-485 communication stop bit length
Pr.334 RS-485 communication parity check selection
Pr.335 RS-485 communication retry count
Pr.336 RS-485 communication check time interval
Pr.337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting
Pr.341 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection
Pr.343 Communication error count
Pr.502 Stop mode selection at communication error
Pr.539 Modbus-RTU communication check time interval
Pr.549 Protocol selection
Pr.779 Operation frequency during communication error
(1)
2 (initial value)
V/F5
V/F4
Pr.
0
1
120
334
Voltage
*2
0 to 150ms
9999 (initial value)
0
1 (initial value)
2
Without parity check
With odd parity check
With even parity check
Set the permissible number of retries at
occurrence of a data receive error. If the
number of consecutive errors exceeds the
permissible value, the inverter will come to
an alarm stop.
If a communication error occurs, the
inverter will not come to an alarm stop.
No PU connector communication
Communication with RS-485 terminal can
be made, but the inverter will come to an
alarm stop in the NET operation mode.
Set the interval of communication check
time.
If a no-communication state persists for
longer than the permissible time, the
inverter will come to an alarm stop.
No communication check
Set the waiting time between data
transmission to the inverter and response.
Set with communication data.
Without CR/LF
With CR
With CR/LF
When making communication through Modbus-RTU protocol with the RS485 terminals, the setting range of Pr.331 within parenthesis is applied.
The values in parenthesis are added to the setting range of Pr.332.
(2) Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr.342)
When parameter write is performed from PU connector, RS485 terminal, and communication option connected
to the inverter, parameter’s storage device can be changed
from EEPROM + RAM to only RAM. When performing
parameter change frequently, set "1" in Pr. 342.
(3) Modbus-RTU communication specifications (Pr.343,
Pr.539, Pr.549)
* The Modbus-RTU protocol is valid for only communication from the RS-485
terminals.
Pr. Number
Setting
Range
343

Initial settings and specifications of RS-485
communication (Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.341)
Used to perform required settings for RS-485 communication
between the inverter and personal computer.
There are two different communications: communication
using the PU connector of the inverter and communication
using the RS-485 terminals.
You can perform parameter setting, monitor, etc. using the
Mitsubishi inverter protocol or Modbus-RTU protocol.
To make communication between the personal computer and
inverter, initialization of the communication specifications
must be made to the inverter.
Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings
are not made or there is any setting error.
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
0
539
549
0.1 to
999.8s
9999
(initial value)
0
(initial value)
1
Description
Display the number of communication errors
during Modbus-RTU communication.
Reading only
Modbus-RTU communication is available, but
the inverter trips in the NET operation mode.
Sets the interval of communication check
time.
(same specifications as Pr. 122).
No communication check
(signal loss detection)
Mitsubishi inverter (computer link) protocol
Connection
example
10
11
Standard
Specifications
8bit
Data length
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
1bit
2bit
Stop bit length
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
119
333
0
1 (initial value)
A dedicated V/F pattern can be made by freely setting the V/F
characteristic between a startup and the base frequency and
base voltage under V/F control (frequency voltage/frequency).
Possible to set the torque pattern that is optimum for the
machine’s characteristic
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Set the communication speed.
The setting value 100 equals the
communication speed.
For example, the communication speed is
19200bps when the setting value is "192".
Parameter
List
48, 96, 192, 384
(3, 6, 12, 24) *2
Explanations
of
Parameters
118
332
Pr.101 V/F1(first frequency voltage)
Pr.103 V/F2(second frequency voltage)
Pr.105 V/F3(third frequency voltage)
Pr.107 V/F4(fourth frequency voltage)
Pr.109 V/F5(fifth frequency voltage)
Protective
Functions
Specify the inverter station number.
Set the inverter station numbers when two
or more inverters are connected to one
personal computer.
Options
0 to 31
(0 to 247) *1
Instructions
117
331
V/F
Motor
Description
IPM
motor control
Adjustable 5 points V/F
Pr.100 V/F1(first frequency)
Pr.102 V/F2(second frequency)
Pr.104 V/F3(third frequency)
Pr.106 V/F4(fourth frequency)
Pr.108 V/F5(fifth frequency)
Setting Range
Compatibility
100 to 109
Pr.
Number
Modbus-RTU protocol
Warranty
Pr.
Features
.
52
(4) operation selection at communication error (Pr.502,
Pr.779)
(2) Analog input bias/gain calibration
(C2(Pr.902) to C7(Pr.905))
 The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust the
relationship between the input signal entered from outside
the inverter to set the output frequency, e.g. 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V
or 4 to 20mADC, and the output frequency.
 Set the bias frequency of terminal 2 input using C2(Pr.902).
(Factory-set to the frequency at 0V)
 Using Pr. 125 , set the output frequency relative to the
frequency command voltage (current) set in Pr. 73 Analog
input selection.
 Set the bias frequency of the terminal 4 input using
C5(Pr.904).
(Factory-set to the frequency at 4mA)
 Using Pr. 126 , set the output frequency relative to 20mA of
the frequency command current (4 to 20mA).
For communication using RS-485 terminals or a
communication option, operation at a communication error can
be selected. The operation is active under the Network
operation mode.
Pr.
Number
Setting
Range
Description
At error
occurrence
0
Coasts to
(initial value) stop
502
Fault
output
At error
removal
E.SER*
Output
Stops
(E.SER)*
1
Decelerates
to stop
E.SER
after stop*
Output
after stop
Stops
(E.SER)*
2
Decelerates
to stop
E.SER
after stop*
Without
output
Restarts
3
Continues
running at
Pr.779

Without
output
Operates
normally
0 to 400Hz
779
Indication
(3) Analog input display unit changing (Pr.241)
Motor runs at the specified frequency at a
communication error.
9999
Motor runs at the frequency used before the
(initial value) communication error.
* E.OP1 appears when using a communication option.
Pr. 125 Pr. 126 Pr.
241, C2(902) to C7(905)
Analog input frequency change and voltage, current input and
frequency adjustment (calibration)
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency
Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
Pr. 241 Analog input display unit switchover
C2(Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency
C3(Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias C4(Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
C5(Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency
C6(Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias C7(Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
 You can set the magnitude (slope) of the output frequency as
desired in relation to the frequency setting signal (0 to 5VDC, 0 to
10V or 4 to 20mA).
(1)
Change the frequency at maximum analog input.
(Pr.125, Pr.126)
Set a value in Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) when changing only the frequency
setting (gain) of the maximum analog input power (current). (C2
(Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905) setting need not be changed)
Pr.
PID control
Pr.127 PID control automatic switchover frequency
Pr.128 PID action selection
Pr.129 PID proportional band
Pr.130 PID integral time
Pr.131 PID upper limit
Pr.132 PID lower limit
Pr.133 PID action set point
Pr.134 PID differential time
Pr.241 Analog input display unit switchover
Pr.553 PID deviation limit
Pr.554 PID signal operation selection
Pr.575 Output interruption detection time Pr.576 Output interruption detection level
Pr.577 Output interruption cancel level C42(Pr.934) PID display bias coefficient
C43(Pr.934) PID display bias analog value C44(Pr.935) PID display gain coefficient
C45(Pr.935) PID display gain analog value
The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow
rate, air volume or pressure.
The terminal 2 input signal or parameter setting is used as a set point
and the terminal 4 input signal used as a feedback value to constitute
a feedback system for PID control.
 Pr.128 = "10, 11, 110, 111" (Deviation value signal input)
Inverter circuit
Set point
+To outside
Deviation signal
Terminal 1*
0 to 10VDC
(0 to 5V)
PID operation
1
Kp 1+ Ti S +Td S
Feedback signal (measured value)
 Pr.128 = "20, 21, 120, 121" (Measured value input)
Pr. 133 or
terminal 2 *1
+Set point
0 to 5VDC
(0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA)
Terminal 4 *2
60Hz
PID operation
Kp 1+ Ti
1
Feedback signal (measured value)
Gain Pr.125
Bias
(Pr. 902)
0
0
Frequency setting signal
0
0
C3 (Pr. 902)
100%
5V
10V
20mA
C4 (Pr. 903)
Output frequency
(Hz)
Initial value
60Hz
Bias
C5
(Pr. 904)
Manipulated Motor
variable
M
Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
C2
53
127 to 134, 241, 553, 554, 575 to 577, C42 (934)
to C45 (935)
Inverter circuit
Initial value
Output frequency
(Hz)
 You can change the analog input display unit (%/V/mA) for
analog input bias/gain calibration.
Gain Pr. 126
20
0
4 Frequency setting signal
0
1
0
2
0
C6 (Pr. 904)
100%
20mA
5V
10V
C7 (Pr. 905)
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
S +Td
S
Manipulated Motor
variable
M
4 to 20mADC (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V)
Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
Pr. 166
The complicated sequence circuit for commercial power supplyinverter switchover is built in the inverter. Hence, merely inputting
the start, stop or automatic switchover selection signal facilitates
the interlock operation of the switchover magnetic contactor.
Description
0 (initial value)
Without commercial power-supply switchover sequence
MC2
Pr. 167 = 0 or 1
MC1
*1
MC3
*1
MC2
MC2
(MC2)OL
145
OFF
ON
Pr. 153
Detection time
Features
ON
Pr. 153
Detection time
* Once turned ON, the zero current detection time
signal (Y13) is held on for at least 0.1s.
Refer to the section about Pr. 29
Refer to the section about Pr. 37
Parameter unit display language
selection
Pr. 154
Refer to the section about Pr. 22
Pr.
Selection of action conditions of
the second function signal (RT)
155
Pr.155 RT signal function validity condition selection
You can select the second function using the external terminal
(RT signal).
You can also set the RT signal operation condition (reflection time).
Pr.155 Setting
Description
This function is immediately made valid with on
of the RT signal.
This function is valid only during the RT signal
is on and constant speed operation. (invalid
during acceleration/deceleration)
0 (initial value)
You can switch the display language of the parameter unit (FRPU04/FR-PU07) to another.
Pr.145 Setting
Description
0 (initial value)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Japanese
English
German
French
Spanish
Italian
Swedish
Finnish
Pr.
OFF
Parameter
List
SE
Pr.145 PU display language selection
Pr. 148, 149
Time
ON
Refer to the section about Pr. 22
150 to 153, 166, 167
Detection of output current (Y12 signal) detection
of zero current (Y13 signal)
Pr.150 Output current detection level
Pr.151 Output current detection signal delay time
Pr.152 Zero current detection level
Pr.153 Zero current detection time
Pr.166 Output current detection signal retention time
Pr.167 Output current detection operation selection
The output current during inverter running can be detected and
output to the output terminal.
10
 The functions that can be set as second functions
(When the RT signal is ON, the following second functions are
selected at the same time.)
First
Second
Function
Function
Parameter Parameter
Number
Number
Function
Applied control mode
(: Valid, : Invalid)
V/F
S MFVC
IPM
Pr.44









Pr.44,
Pr.45



Pr.9
Pr.51


Stall prevention
Pr.22
Pr.48,
Pr.49


Pr. 156, 157
Refer to the section about Pr. 22
Torque boost
Pr.0
Pr.46
Base frequency
Pr.3
Pr.47
Acceleration time
Pr.7
Pr.8
Deceleration
time
Electronic thermal O/L relay
Pr. 158
Refer to the section about Pr. 54
Pr. 159
Refer to the section about Pr. 135
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.

(Pr.9 is valid)

Explanations
of
Parameters
Zero current
detection time
(Y13)
(MC3)FU
Take caution for the capacity of the sequence output terminal.
When connecting a DC power supply, insert a protective diode.
The used terminal changes depending on the setting of Pr. 180 to Pr. 189
(input terminal function selection).
Pr. 144
0.1s*
OFF
24VDC
MC3
Commercial power-supply switchover sequence connection diagram
Pr. 140 to 143
Start signal
*2
Pr.152
Protective
Functions
10
2
5
Pr.152
0[A]
(MC1)IPF
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Output
current
JOG(OH)
RES
SD
Frequency
setting signal
 If the output current remains lower than the Pr.152 setting
during inverter operation for longer than the time set in
Pr.153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from
the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal.
External
thermal relay
M
*1
*3
External
thermal reset
(2) Zero current detection (Y13 signal, Pr. 152, Pr. 153)
R1/L11
S1/L21
STF
CS
MRS
OFF
ON
Options
Inverter start
(forward rotation)
Inverter/bypass
operation
interlock
MC3
OFF
Instructions
U
V
W
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Pr.
Output current
detection signal
(Y12)
Time
Motor
MC1
MCCB
*1
*2
*3
Pr. 166
Minimum 0.1s
(initial value)
With commercial power-supply switchover sequence
Sink logic type, Pr.185 = "7", Pr.192 = "17", Pr.193 = "18", Pr.194 = "19"
Pr. 151
IPM
motor control
1
Pr. 150
Output current
Standard
Specifications
Pr.135 Setting
9999, Pr. 167 = 0
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
Pr.135 Electronic bypass sequence selection
Pr.136 MC switchover interlock time
Pr.137 Start waiting time
Pr.138 Bypass selection at a fault
Pr.139 Automatic switchover frequency from inverter to bypass operation
Pr.159 Automatic switchover frequency range from bypass to inverter operation
Connection
example
 The output current detection function can be used for
excessive torque detection, etc.
 If the output current remains higher than the Pr.150 setting
during inverter operation for longer than the time set in
Pr.151, the output current detection signal (Y12) is output
from the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal.
S MFVC
Compatibility
V/F
Warranty
Pr.
(1) Output current detection
(Y12 signal, Pr. 150, Pr. 151, Pr. 166, Pr. 167)
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
Switch between the inverter operation and
135 to 139, 159 commercial power-supply operation to use
54
Pr. 160 Pr.
Pr.
172 to 174
Display of applied parameters and user group function
Pr.160 User group read selection
Pr.172 User group registered display/batch clear
Pr.173 User group registration
Pr.174 User group clear
 Parameter which can be read from the operation panel and parameter
unit can be restricted.
In the initial setting, only the simple mode parameters are displayed.
Pr. 160
Description
Setting
9999
(initial value)
(1)
of
Pr.179 STR terminal function selection
Pr.181 RM terminal function selection
Pr.183 RT terminal function selection
Pr.185 JOG terminal function selection
Pr.187 MRS terminal function selection
Pr.189 RES terminal function selection
Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions.
Pr.178 to
Pr.189
Setting
Signal
Name
0
RL
Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
Function
Pr.59 =0
(initial value)
Low speed operation command
0
Simple mode+extended parameters can be displayed.
Pr.59 =1, 2 *1
Remote setting (setting clear)
1
Only parameters registered to the user group can be displayed.
Pr.59 =0
(initial value)
Middle speed operation
command
Pr.59 =1, 2 *1
Remote setting (deceleration)
Pr.59 =0
(initial value)
High speed operation command
Pr.59 =1, 2 *1
Remote setting (acceleration)
1
 When Pr. 160 = "9999" (initial value), only the simple mode
parameters can be displayed on the operation panel (FRDU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
 When “0” is set in Pr. 160, simple mode parameters and
extended parameters can be displayed.
RH
3
RT
Second function selection
4
AU
Terminal 4 input selection
5
JOG
6
CS
7
OH
External thermal relay input
8
REX
15 speed selection
(combination with three speeds RL, RM, RH)
10
X10
Inverter operation enable signal
(FR-HC2, FR-CV connection)
11
X11
FR-HC2 connection, instantaneous power failure
detection
12
X12
PU operation external interlock
14
X14
PID control valid terminal
16
X16
PU-external operation switchover
24
MRS
25
STOP
60
STF
Forward rotation command
(assigned to STF terminal (Pr. 178) only)
61
STR
Reverse rotation command
(assigned to STR terminal (Pr. 179) only)
62
RES
Inverter reset
63
PTC
PTC thermistor input
(assigned to AU terminal (Pr. 184) only)
Key lock mode
invalid
64
X64
PID forward/reverse action switchover
65
X65
NET/PU operation switchover
Key lock mode
valid
66
X66
External/NET operation switchover
67
X67
Command source switchover
70
X70
DC feeding operation permission
71
X71
DC feeding cancel
72
X72
PID integral value reset
9999

 The user group function is designed to display only the
parameters necessary for setting.
 From among all parameters, a maximum of 16 parameters
can be registered to a user group. When Pr. 160 is set in "1",
only the parameters registered to the user group can be
accessed. (The parameters not registered to the user group
cannot be read.)
 To register a parameter to the user group, set its parameter
number to Pr. 173.
 To delete a parameter from the user group, set its parameter
number to Pr. 174. To batch-delete the registered
parameters, set Pr. 172 in "9999".
161
Operation selection
operation panel
of
the
You can use the setting dial of the operation panel (FR-DU07)
like a potentiometer to perform operation.
The key operation of the operation panel can be disabled.
0 (initial value)
Description
Setting dial frequency setting mode
1
Setting dial potentiometer mode
10
Setting dial frequency setting mode
11
Setting dial potentiometer mode
Pr. 162 to 165
Pr. 166, 167
Pr. 168, 169
Pr. 170, 171
Pr. 172 to 174
Refer to the section about Pr. 57
Refer to the section about Pr. 150
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Refer to the section about Pr. 52
Refer to the section about Pr. 160
Jog operation selection
Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure, flying start
Electronic bypass function
Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection
Pr.161 Setting
RM
2
(2) User group function (Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174)
55
Function assignment
input terminal
Pr.178 STF terminal function selection
Pr.180 RL terminal function selection
Pr.182 RH terminal function selection
Pr.184 AU terminal function selection
Pr.186 CS terminal function selection
Pr.188 STOP terminal function selection
Display of simple mode parameters and extended
parameters (Pr.160)
Pr.
178 to 189
*1
*2
*3
*2
Output stop
Electronic bypass function
Start self-holding selection *3
No function
When Pr. 59 Remote function selection = "1" or "2", the functions of the RL,
RM and RH signals are changed as given in the table.
The OH signal turns on when the relay contact "opens".
These signals are available under V/F control and Simple magnetic flux
vector control.
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
2
102
IPF
Instantaneous power failure/
undervoltage
3
103
OL
Overload alarm
4
104
FU
Output frequency detection
5
105
FU2
Second output frequency
detection
7
107
RBP
Regenerative brake prealarm *1
8
108
THP
Electronic thermal relay function
prealarm
10
110
PU
PU operation mode
11
111
RY
Inverter operation ready
12
112
Y12
Output current detection
13
113
Y13
Zero current detection
14
114
FDN
PID lower limit
15
115
FUP
PID upper limit
16
116
RL
17

MC1
Commercial power-supply
switchover MC1 *2
18

MC2
Commercial power-supply
switchover MC2 *2
19

MC3
Commercial power-supply
switchover MC3 *2
25
125
FAN
Fan fault output
26
126
FIN
Heatsink overheat pre-alarm
45
145
RUN3
46
146
Y46
*3
During inverter running and start
command is on
During deceleration at
occurrence of power failure
(retained until release)
47
147
PID
During PID control activated
48
148
Y48
PID deviation limit
57
157
IPM
IPM motor control *3
64
164
Y64
During retry
67
167
Y67
During power failure
70
170
SLEEP
79
179
Y79
Pulse train output of output power
85
185
Y85
DC current feeding
90
190
Y90
Life alarm
91
191
Y91
Alarm output 3 (power-off signal)
92
192
Y92
Energy saving average value
updated timing
93
193
Y93
Current average monitor signal
94
194
ALM2
95
195
Y95
Maintenance timer signal
96
196
REM
Remote output
98
198
LF
99
199
ALM
9999
*1
*2
PID forward/reverse rotation
output

Pr. 244 Setting
Pr.
Description
0
The cooling fan operates at power on.
Cooling fan on/off control invalid (The cooling
fan is always on at power on)
1 (initial value)
Cooling fan on/off control valid
The fan is normally on during inverter
operation. The fan switches on/off according to
the temperature during a stop of the inverter
whose status is monitored.
245 to 247
Slip compensation
V/F
S MFVC
Pr.245 Stop selection
Pr.246 Slip compensation time constant
Pr.247 Constant-power range slip compensation selection
The inverter output current may be used to assume motor slip to
keep the motor speed constant.
Pr.
250
Selection of motor stopping
method and start signal
Pr.250 Stop selection
Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or
coasting) when the start signal turns off.
Used to stop the motor with a mechanical brake, etc. together
with switching off of the start signal.
You can also select the operations of the start signals (STF/STR).
Pr.250
Setting
Description
Start signal
(STF/STR)
0 to 100s
STF signal: Forward rotation
start
STR signal: Reverse rotation
start
1000s to 1100s
STF signal: Start signal
STR signal: Forward/reverse
rotation signal
9999
(initial value)
STF signal: Forward rotation
start
STR signal: Reverse rotation
start
During PID output suspension
Alarm output 2
Minor fault output
Alarm output
No function
Setting can be made for the 75K or higher.
These signals are available under V/F control and Simple magnetic flux
vector control.
This function is available only under IPM motor control.
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
8888
STF signal: Start signal
STR signal: Forward/reverse
rotation signal
Stop operation
The motor is coasted to a
stop when the preset
time elapses after the
start signal is turned off.
The motor is coasted to a
stop (Pr. 250 - 1000)s
after the start signal is
turned off.
When the start signal is
turned off, the motor
decelerates to stop.
Features
Connection
example
Standard
Specifications
Up to frequency
You can control the operation of the cooling fan (200V class
2.2K or higher, 400V class 3.7K or higher) built in the inverter.
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
Inverter running
SU
Pr.244 Cooling fan operation selection
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
RUN
101
Increase cooling fan life
244
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
100
1
Pr.
Parameter
List
0
Refer to the section about Pr. 73
Pr. 242, 243
Explanations
of
Parameters
Function
Negative
logic
Refer to the section about Pr. 125, Pr.126
Protective
Functions
Signal
Name
Positive
logic
Pr. 241
Options
Pr.190 to Pr.196
Setting
Refer to the section about Pr. 72
Instructions
You can change the functions of the open collector output
terminal and relay output terminal.
Pr. 240
Motor
Pr.190 RUN terminal function selection Pr.191 SU terminal function selection
Pr.192 IPF terminal function selection Pr.193 OL terminal function selection
Pr.194 FU terminal function selection
Pr.195 ABC1 terminal function selection
Pr.196 ABC2 terminal function selection
Refer to the section about Pr.4 to Pr.6
Pr. 232 to 239
IPM
motor control
Terminal assignment of output terminal
Compatibility
190 to 196
Warranty
Pr.
56
When Pr. 250 is set to "9999" (initial value) or "8888".
Output frequency
(Hz)
Deceleration starts
when start signal turns OFF
Deceleration time
(Time set in Pr. 8, etc.)
DC brake
Time
Start
signal
RUN
signal
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
When Pr. 250 is set to values other than "9999" (initial value) or "8888".
Output frequency
(Hz)
Output is shut off when set
time elapses after start signal
turns OFF
Pr.250
Motor coasts to stop
Time
ON
RUN signal
Pr.
When a power failure or undervoltage occurs, the inverter can
be decelerated to a stop or can be decelerated and reaccelerated to the set frequency.
Description
Pr.
Number
OFF
Input/output phase failure
protection selection
251, 872
Pr.251 Output phase loss protection selection
Pr.872 Input phase loss protection selection
251
872
Pr. 252, 253
Pr.
Setting Range
Description
0
Without output phase failure protection
1 (initial value)
With output phase failure protection
0 (initial value)
Without input phase failure protection
1
With input phase failure protection
255 to 259
Pr.255 Life alarm status display
Pr.256 Inrush current limit circuit life display
Pr.257 Control circuit capacitor life display Pr.258 Main circuit capacitor life display
Pr.259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring
Degrees of deterioration of main circuit capacitor, control circuit
capacitor or inrush current limit circuit and cooling fan can be
diagnosed by monitor.
When any part has approached the end of its life, an alarm can
be output by self diagnosis to prevent a fault.
(Use the life check of this function as a guideline since the life
except the main circuit capacitor is calculated theoretically.)
Pr.
Number
57
Setting
Range
263
255
(0 to 15)
256
(0 to 100%)
Display the deterioration degree of the inrush
current limit circuit. Reading only
257
(0 to 100%)
Display the deterioration degree of the control
circuit capacitor. Reading only
258
(0 to 100%)
Display the deterioration degree of the main
circuit capacitor. Reading only
The value measured by Pr. 259 is displayed.
259
0, 1
(2, 3, 8, 9)
Setting "1" and turning off the power starts the
measurement of the main circuit capacitor life.
When the Pr. 259 value is "3" after powering on
again, the measuring is completed. Read the
deterioration degree in Pr. 258.
At power
restoration
during power
failure
deceleration
0 (initial
value)
Coasts to a stop
Coasts to a stop
—
1
Decelerates to a
stop
Decelerates to a
stop
Depends on Pr. 262
to Pr. 266 settings
2
Decelerates to a
stop
Accelerates
again
Depends on Pr. 262
to Pr. 266 settings
21
Decelerates to a
stop
Decelerates to a
stop
Automatically
adjusts the
deceleration time
22
Decelerates to a
stop
Accelerates
again
Automatically
adjusts the
deceleration time
264
265
Normally operation can be performed with the initial
value unchanged. But adjust the frequency according
to the magnitude of the load specifications (moment of
inertia, torque).
0 to
120Hz
When output frequency  Pr. 263
Decelerate from the speed obtained from output
frequency minus Pr. 262.
When output frequency < Pr. 263
Decelerate from output frequency
Decelerate from the speed obtained from output
frequency minus Pr. 262.
0 to 3600/
360s *
Set a deceleration slope down to the frequency set in
Pr. 266.
0 to 3600/
360s *
Set a deceleration slope below the frequency set in Pr.
266.
9999
266
Deceleration time
to a stop
0 to
20Hz
9999
0 to
400Hz
Same slope as in Pr. 264
Set the frequency at which the deceleration slope is
switched from the Pr. 264 setting to the Pr. 265 setting.
* When the setting of Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments is "0"
(initial value), the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and the setting increments
are "0.1s", and when the setting is "1", the setting range is "0 to 360s" and
the setting increments are "0.01s"
Description
Display whether the control circuit capacitor,
main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each
parts of the inrush current limit circuit has
reached the life alarm output level or not.
Reading only
Pr. 260
262
Refer to the section about Pr. 73
Display of the life of the
inverter parts
Operation at
undervoltage or
power failure
Setting
Range
261
You can disable the output phase failure protection function that
stops the inverter output if one of the inverter output side (load
side) three phases (U, V, W) opens.
The input phase failure protection selection of the inverter input
side (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) can be made valid.
Pr. Number
Operation at instantaneous
261 to 266 power failure
Pr.261 Power failure stop selection
Pr.262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start
Pr.263 Subtraction starting frequency
Pr.264 Power-failure deceleration time 1
Pr.265 Power-failure deceleration time 2
Pr.266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency
OFF
ON
Start signal
Pr.
Refer to the section about Pr. 72
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Power supply
Output
frequency
Power-failure
deceleration
time switchover
frequency
Pr.266
Subtracted
frequency at
deceleration start
Pr.262
Pr.264
Power-failure
deceleration time 1
Pr.265
Power-failure
deceleration
time 2
Time
Pr.296 Password lock level
STF
Y46
Pr.261 = 21
During stop at
occurrence of
power failure
Time
STF
Y46
Read
Write
9999
(initial
value)






0, 100
1, 101












2, 102
3, 103












4, 104
5, 105












6, 106
Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again
99, 199
operation
Pr.
Number
1000 to
9998
297 *1
9999
(initial value)
*1
*2
Refer to the section about Pr. 57
Refer to the section about Pr. 117
Reacceleration*
Time
* Acceleration time depends on Pr. 7 (Pr. 44 ).
Compatibility
When used with automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure
During power failure
Power
supply
Automatic restart
after instantaneous
power failure
Time
Y46
Password being unlocked
If the password has been forgotten, perform all parameter clear to unlock
the parameter restriction. In that case, other parameters are also
cleared.
"0 or 9999" can be set to Pr. 297 at any time although the setting is invalid
(the displayed value does not change).
Pr. 299
Y46
During deceleration
at occurrence of
power failure
Displays password unlock error count. (Reading
only)
(Valid when Pr. 296 = "100" to "106")
Motor
at occurrence of
power failure
Output
frequency
Description
Register a 4-digit password
(0 to 5) *2
Pr. 331 to 337
When power is restored during
deceleration at occurrence of
power failure
IPF
9999
Setting
Range
Explanations
of
Parameters
: enabled, : restricted
Output
frequency During deceleration
Pr.261 = 2, 22, Pr.57






Only the parameters registered in the user group can be read/
written.
(For the parameters not registered in the user group, same
restriction level as "4, 104" applies.)
Protective
Functions
 When power is restored during deceleration after an
instantaneous power failure, acceleration is made again up to
the set frequency.
 When this function is used in combination with the automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure operation, deceleration
can be made at a power failure and acceleration can be made
again after power restoration.
When power is restored after a stop by deceleration at an
instantaneous power failure, automatic restart operation is
performed if automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
has been selected (Pr. 57  "9999")
 With the Pr.261 = "22" setting, the deceleration time is
automatically adjusted to keep (DC bus) voltage constant in the
converter when the motor decelerates to a stop at a power
failure. The motor re-accelerates to the set frequency if the
power is restored during the deceleration to stop. (Setting Pr.
261 = "22" disables the settings of Pr. 262 to Pr. 266.)
NET Mode Operation Command
Communication
option
Read
Write
Read
Write
RS-485 terminal
IPM
motor control
Output frequency
During deceleration at
occurrence of power failure
Deceleration time: automatically adjusted
(2) Instantaneous
power
failure-time
continuation function (Pr.261 = “2, 22”)
PU Mode
Operation
Command
Pr. 296
Setting
Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again
Power
supply
Features
 Level of reading/writing restriction by PU/Network(NET) mode
operation command can be selected by Pr. 296.
Time
Pr. 261 = 2, 22
Pr.297 Password lock/unlock
Registering a 4-digit password can restrict parameter reading/
writing.
During stop at
occurrence of
power failure
Reset time + Pr.57
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Warranty
Output frequency
During deceleration at
occurrence of power failure
Power
supply
Password function
296, 297
Standard
Specifications
Pr.
Pr.261 = 1
Power
supply
Connection
example
Pr. 269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
Refer to the section about Pr. 52
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
Pr. 268
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Refer to the section about Pr. 73
Parameter
List
Pr. 267
Options
 If power is restored during power failure deceleration,
deceleration to a stop is continued and the inverter remains
stopped.To restart, turn off the start signal once, then turn it
on again.
 With the Pr.261 = "21" setting, the deceleration time is
automatically adjusted to keep (DC bus) voltage constant in
the converter when the motor decelerates to a stop at a
power failure. (The Pr.262 to Pr.266 settings become invalid.)
Instructions
(1) Power failure stop mode (Pr.261 = “1, 21”)
58
Pr.
Pr.
338, 339, 550, 551
Operation command source and speed command
source during communication operation
Pr.338 Communication operation command source
Pr.339 Communication speed command source
Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection
Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection
When the RS-485 terminals or communication option is used,
the external operation command and speed command can be
made valid. Also, the control command source in the PU
operation mode can be selected.
Pr.
Number
Setting
Range
338
0
(initial value)
1
Pr.495 Remote output selection
Pr.497 Remote output data 2
Pr.
Number
b11
b0
Y0 *2
Y1 *2
Y2 *2
No function
Motor speed
Pr.374
Coast to stop
Time
ALM
Y3 *2
9999
(initial value)
Y4 *2
0 to 400Hz
Y5 *2
Description
When the motor speed exceeds the speed set in Pr.374,
overspeed (E.OS) occurs, and the inverter outputs are
stopped.
Y6 *2
Pr. 502
Inverter outputs are stopped when the motor speed exceeds the
Pr.374 Overspeed detection level under IPM motor control.
Pr.374 Setting
RA1 *3
IPM
RA2 *3
Overspeed detection
RA3 *3
374
*1 As desired
*2 Y0 to Y6 are available only when the extension output option (FR-A7AY) is
fitted
*3 RA1 to RA3 are available only when the relay output option (FR-A7AR) is
fitted
Pr.374 Overspeed detection level
ON
E.OS
59
*1
*1
Refer to the section about Pr. 117
RUN
Pr.497
Refer to the section about Pr. 79
Pr. 341 to 343
SU
PU connector is the command source when PU
operation mode.
IPF
2
(initial value)
OL
RS-485 terminals are the command source when
PU operation mode.
b0
FU
1
b11
ABC1
Automatic communication option recognition
Normally, RS-485 terminals are the command
source. When a communication option is mounted,
the communication option is the command source.
<Remote output data>
Pr.496
ABC2
9999
(initial value)
Refer to the following diagram.
*1
RS-485 terminals are the command source when
NET operation mode.
*1
1
Remote output data is
retained during an
inverter reset
* This parameter allows its setting to be changed during operation in any
operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.
*1
The communication option is the command
source when NET operation mode.
0 to 4095
0 to 4095
*1
0
496
497
Remote output data is
cleared during an
inverter reset
Remote output data
retention even at
powering OFF
Remote output data
clear at powering OFF
Remote output data
retention even at
powering OFF
11
* Pr. 550 and Pr. 551 are always write-enabled.
Pr.
Remote output data
clear at powering OFF
10
*1
2
Frequency command source external (Frequency
command from communication is valid, frequency
command from terminal 2 is invalid)
Pr.496 Remote output data 1
Description
495
Frequency command source communication
Frequency command source external
Pr. 340
Setting
Range
0
(initial
value)
1
Start command source communication
function
You can utilize the ON/OFF of the inverter's output signals
instead of the remote output terminal of the programmable
controller.
Description
1
550 *
551 *
Remote output
(REM signal)
Start command source external
0
(initial value)
339
495 to 497
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Refer to the section about Pr. 117
OFF
Y95 signal
MT display
ON
ON
 The cumulative energization time of the inverter is stored into the
EEPROM every hour and indicated in Pr. 503 Maintenance timer in
100h increments. Pr. 503 is clamped at 9998 (999800h).
Pr.
The motor coasts to a stop (inverter output shutoff) when
inverter output frequency falls to Pr. 522 setting or lower.
9999
(initial
value)
Description
4) Maintenance timer pulse
The maintenance timer value (Pr. 503) is output
as Hi output pulse shape for 2 to 9s (16000h to
72000h).
Pr. 503 100h
5s
Signal output time=
40000h
Refer to the section about Pr. 13
Pr. 571
Pr. 575 to 577
Set the frequency to start coasting to a stop (output shutoff).
Refer to the section about Pr. 127
Refer to the section about Pr. 57
Pr. 611
No function
 When both of the frequency setting signal and output frequency
falls to the frequency set in Pr.522 or lower, the inverter stops the
output and the motor coasts to a stop.
Example of when target frequency>Pr.522+2Hz, and start signal is ON/OFF
Target frequency
(fixed)
Pr.522+2Hz
Pr.522
Pr.13
Time
Inverter output shutoff
STF
Pr.
S MFVC
Pr.654 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency
 Set "100%" in Pr.653 and check the vibration. Lower the setting
gradually and adjust to the point where the vibration is minimum.
 When the vibrational frequency due to the mechanical resonance
(fluctuation of torque, speed, and converter output voltage) is
known using a tester and such, set 1/2 to 1 time of the vibrational
frequency to Pr.654. (Setting vibrational frequency range can
suppress the vibration better.)
RUN
Refer to the section about Pr.117 to Pr. 124
Features
Motor
Torque fluctuation
detection range
0
Pr.654
159Hz (fixed)
Vibrational frequency
Pr. 665
Refer to the section about Pr.882
Pr. 779
Refer to the section about Pr.117
Warranty
Refer to the section about Pr. 338, Pr.339
Connection
example
Cutoff frequency
Current for
torque
 At a stop condition, the motor starts running when the frequency
setting signal exceeds Pr.522 +2Hz. The motor is accelerated at
the Pr.13 Starting frequency (0.01Hz under IPM motor control) at the
start.
Pr. 550 to 551
V/F
Pr.653 Speed smoothing control
* The output frequency before the slip compensation is
compared with the Pr.522 setting.
Standard
Specifications
Machine resonance suppression
653, 654
The vibration (resonance) of the machine during motor operation
can be suppressed.
Output frequency*
Pr. 549
5) End pulse
output as low pulse
shape for 1 to 16.5s
3) Output current average value pulse
The averaged current value is output as low pulse shape for
0.5 to 9s (10 to 180%) during start pulse output.
Output current average value (A)
5s
Signal output time=
Pr. 557 (A)
Pr.522 Output stop frequency
Pr.522
Setting
0 to 400Hz
Y93 signal
1) Data output mask time
When the speed has changed to constant
from acceleration/deceleration, Y93 signal is
not output for Pr. 556 time.
2) Start pulse
Output as Hi pulse shape for 1s (fixed)
The output currents are averaged during the time
period set in Pr. 555.
Output stop function
522
Time
Next cycle
1 cycle (20s)
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
Output
frequency
T
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
From acceleration to constant speed operation
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
The average value of the output current during constant speed
operation and the maintenance timer value are output as a pulse to
the current average value monitor signal (Y93).
The pulse width output to the I/O module of the PLC or the like can
be used as a guideline due to abrasion of machines and elongation
of belt and for aged deterioration of devices to know the maintenance time.
The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is output as
pulse for 20s as 1 cycle and repeatedly output during constant
speed operation.
Parameter
List
Set "0" in Pr.503
Maintenance
timer
Pr.504
(Pr. 503)
Pr.555 Current average time
Pr.556 Data output mask time
Pr.557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current
Explanations
of
Parameters
ON
9998
(999800h)
value
Protective
Functions
First power
Current
average
monitor signal
Options
Pr.504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time
When the cumulative energization time of the inverter reaches
the parameter set time, the maintenance timer output signal
(Y95) is output.
(MT) is displayed on the operation panel
(FR-DU07)
This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance time of
peripheral devices.
555 to 557
Instructions
Pr.503 Maintenance timer
Pr.
IPM
motor control
To determine the
maintenance time of parts.
503 to 504
Compatibility
Pr.
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
60
Pr.
799
Pulse train output of output
power (Y79 signal)
Pr.799 Pulse increment setting for output power
After power ON or inverter reset, output signal (Y79
signal) is output in pulses every time accumulated output
power, which is counted after the Pr.799 Pulse increment
setting for output power is set, reaches the specified value
(or its integral multiples).
Pr.799 setting
Description
0.1kWh,
1kWh (initial value)
10kWh, 100kWh,
1000kWh
Pulse train output of output power (Y79) is output in
pulses at every output power (kWh) that is
specified.
 The inverter continues to count the output power at retry function
or when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
function works without power OFF of output power (power failure
that is too short to cause an inverter reset), and it does not reset
the count.
 If power failure occurs, output power is counted from 0kWh again.
 Assign pulse output of output power (Y79: setting value 79
(positive logic), 179 (negative logic)) to any of Pr.190 to Pr.196
(Output terminal function selection).
Pr. 882 to 886, Regeneration avoidance
function
665
Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection
Pr.883 Regeneration avoidance operation level
Pr.884 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity
Pr.885 Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value
Pr.886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain
Pr.665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain
This function detects a regeneration status and increases the
frequency to avoid the regeneration status.
 Possible to avoid regeneration by automatically increasing the
frequency and continue operation if the fan happens to rotate
faster than the set speed due to the effect of another fan in the
same duct.
Pr.
Number
Setting
Range
0
(initial
value)
882
Regeneration avoidance function valid
2
Regeneration avoidance function valid only during
constant-speed operation
300 to
800V
883
10kWh
Regeneration avoidance function invalid
1
Output power
20kWh
Description
Set the bus voltage level at which regeneration
avoidance operates. When the bus voltage level
is set to low, overvoltage error will be less apt to
occur. However, the actual deceleration time
increases. The set value must be higher than the
power supply voltage 
Pulse output of output power
(Y79)
OFF
ON
Time
ON for 0.15s (0.1 to 0.2s)
When Pr.799 = 10
Pr.
IPM motor test operation
800
IPM
Two types of operation can be selected using this parameter: an
actual operation by connecting an IPM motor, or a test operation
without connecting an IPM motor to simulate a virtual operation.
Without connecting an IPM motor, the frequency movement can
be checked by the monitor or analog signal output.
Pr.800 setting
9
20
(initial value)
Description
IPM motor test operation
(Motor is not driven even if it is connected.)
Normal operation (Motor can be driven.)
820, 821
Speed loop gain P gain,
integral time adjustment
IPM
Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1
Pr.821 Speed setting filter 1
Manual adjustment of gain is useful to exhibit the optimum
performance of the machine or to improve unfavorable
conditions such as vibration and acoustic noise during the
operation with high load inertia or gear backlashes.
61
Refer to the section about Pr.41
Pr. 872
Refer to the section about Pr.251
1 to 5
Set sensitivity to detect the bus voltage change
Setting
1
5
Detection sensitivity low
high
9999
886
0 to 200%
665
0 to 200%
Pr.
888, 889
Pr.888 Free parameter 1
Set the limit value of frequency which rises at
activation of regeneration avoidance function.
Frequency limit invalid
Adjust responsiveness at activation of
regeneration avoidance. A larger setting will
improve responsiveness to the bus voltage
change. However, the output frequency could
become unstable. When vibration is not
suppressed by decreasing the Pr. 886 setting, set
a smaller value in Pr. 665.
Free parameter
Pr.889 Free parameter 2
Parameters you can use for your own purposes.
You can input any number within the setting range 0 to 9999.
For example, the number can be used:
 As a unit number when multiple units are used.
 As a pattern number for each operation application when
multiple units are used.
 As the year and month of introduction or inspection.
Pr. 891
 Speed control P gain (Pr.820)
The proportional gain during speed control is set. Setting this
parameter higher improves the trackability for speed command
changes. It also reduces the speed fluctuation due to a load
fluctuation.
 Speed control integral time(Pr.821)
The integral time during speed control is set.
Setting this parameter lower shortens the return time to the
original speed when the speed fluctuates due to a load fluctuation.
Pr. 870
Regeneration avoidance by bus voltage change
ratio is invalid
0 to 10Hz
885
Pr.800 Control method selection
Pr.
884
2.
0
(initial
value)
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Refer to the section about Pr. 52.
0.1%
Ratio of power saving on the assumption that
Pr. 893 is 100%
Indicator
1mA full-scale
analog meter
FM
(Power saving  t)
Pr.897
(Power saving  t)
Pr.897
0.01kWh/
0.1kWh*
0.1%
8VDC
SD
(2) AM terminal calibration (C1(Pr.901))
 The AM terminal is factory-set to output 10VDC in the fullscale state of each monitor item. By setting the calibration
parameter C1 (Pr. 901), the ratio (gain) of the output voltage
can be adjusted to the meter scale. Note that the maximum
output voltage is 10VDC.
0.01/0.1*
Pr. C2(902) to C7(905)
Refer to the section about Pr. 125, Pr. 126
Pr. C42(934) to C45(935)
Refer to the section about Pr.127
Increments
Power
saving
amount
Power saving is added up per hour.
(Power saving  t)
0.01kWh/
0.1kWh*
Power
saving
amount
charge
Power saving amount represented in terms of
charge
Power saving amount  Pr. 896
0.01/0.1*
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Features
Connection
example
Standard
Specifications
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
(-)
* Not needed when the operation panel (FR-DU07) or parameter unit (FRPU04/FR-PU07) is used for calibration. Use a calibration resistor when the
indicator (frequency meter) needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device
because the indicator is located far from the inverter. However, the
frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration
resistor is connected. In this case, perform calibration using the operation
panel or parameter unit.
Ratio of power saving average value on the
assumption that Pr. 893 is 100%
Description and Formula
1440 pulses/s(+)
Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0
Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr. 55 (frequency monitor)
Set with Pr.56 (current monitor)
 The following gives the items which can be monitored by the
cumulative saving power monitor (Pr. 52 = "51").
(The cumulative power monitor data digit can be shifted to the
right by the number set in Pr. 891 Cumulative power monitor digit
shifted times.)
Energy
Saving
Monitor
Item
FM
T2
100
Power saving average value represented in
terms of charge
Power saving average value  Pr. 896
T1
(-)
SD
Power saving average value
100
Pr.893
Power
saving
charge
average
value
(+)
Calibration
resistor*
Average value of power saving amount per hour
during predetermined time (Pr. 897)
(Digital indicator)
1mA
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
 The terminal FM is preset to output pulses. By setting the
Calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900), the meter connected to the
inverter can be calibrated by parameter setting without use
of a calibration resistor.
 Using the pulse train output of the terminal FM, a digital
display can be provided by a digital counter. The monitor
value is 1440 pulses/s output at the full-scale value of Pr. 54
FM terminal function selection.
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
(1) FM terminal calibration (C0(Pr.900))
0.01kW/
0.1kW*
Power saving
Power during commercial power supply operation  100
C1(Pr.901) AM terminal calibration
The operation panel and parameter unit can be used to calibrate
the full scales of the terminals FM and AM.
Parameter
List
Difference between the estimated value of
power necessary for commercial power supply
operation and the input power calculated by the
inverter
Power during commercial power supply
operation - input power monitor
Ratio of power saving on the assumption that
power during commercial power supply
operation is 100%
Increments
Ratio of power saving average value on the
assumption that the value during commercial
power supply operation is 100%
Power
saving
rate
reference
value
Adjustment of terminal FM
C0(900), C1(901) and AM (calibration)
Explanations
of
Parameters
Pr.
C0(Pr.900) FM terminal calibration
Description and Formula
0.01/0.1*
* The increments vary according to the inverter capacity. (55K or lower/75K
or higher)
Power saving
100
Pr.893
Power
saving
average
value
Annual power saving amount represented in
terms of charge
Annual power saving amount  Pr. 896
Protective
Functions
Power
saving
rate
Annual
power
saving
amount
charge
0.01kWh/
0.1kWh*
Options
Power
saving
Power saving amount
Pr.899
24 365 
Operation time during
100
power saving totalization
Instructions
 The following provides the items that can be monitored by the
power saving monitor (Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 158 = "50").
(Only power saving and power saving average value can be
output to Pr. 54 (terminal FM) and Pr. 158 (terminal AM))
Energy
Saving
Monitor
Item
Estimated value of annual power saving amount
Annual
power
saving
amount
From the power consumption estimated value during
commercial power supply operation, the energy saving effect by
use of the inverter can be monitored/output.
Increments
Motor
Pr.892 Load factor
Pr.893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity)
Pr.894 Control selection during commercial power-supply operation
Pr.895 Power saving rate reference value
Pr.896 Power unit cost
Pr.897 Power saving monitor average time
Pr.898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear
Pr.899 Operation time rate (estimated value)
Description and Formula
IPM
motor control
Energy saving monitor
Compatibility
892 to 899
Warranty
Pr.
Energy
Saving
Monitor
Item
62
Pr.
Pr.
989, CL, ALLC, Er.CL, PCPY, CH
Parameter clear, parameter copy, Initial
value change list
Pr.989 Parameter copy alarm release
Pr.CL Parameter clear
Er.CL Faults history clear
Pr.CH Initial value change list
ALLC All parameter clear
PCPY Parameter copy
 Set “1” in Pr.CL Parameter clear to initialize all parameters.
(Calibration parameters are not cleared.)
 Set “1” in ALLC All parameter clear to initialize all parameters. *
 Set “1” in Er.CL Faults history clear to clear alarm history.
 Parameter settings can be copied to multiple inverters by using
PCPY.
When parameters are copied to the 75K or higher inverter from
the 55K or lower inverter or vice versa, an
alarm appears on
the operation panel.
For the parameters whose setting range differ, set Pr.989 as below
after reset.
Initiating a fault
Pr.997 Fault initiation
A fault is initiated by setting the parameter.
This function is useful to check how the system operates at a
fault.
The read value is always "9999." Setting "9999" does not initiate
a fault.
 Setting for Pr. 997 Fault initiation and corresponding
faults
Pr.997
Setting
Fault
Pr.997
Setting
Fault
E.OC1
97
E.SOT
193
E.CTE
E.OC2
112
E.BE
194
E.P24
18
E.OC3
128
E.GF
196
E.CDO
32
E.OV1
129
E.LF
197
E.IOH
33
E.OV2
144
E.OHT
198
E.SER
34
E.OV3
145
E.PTC
199
E.AIE
48
E.THT
160
E.OPT
208
E.OS
49
E.THM
161
E.OP1
230
E.PID
64
E.FIN
176
E.PE
241
E.1
80
E.IPF
177
E.PUE
245
E.5
81
E.UVT
178
E.RET
246
E.6
Cancel
82
E.ILF
179
E.PE2
247
E.7
1
Copy the source parameters in the operation panel.
96
E.OLT
192
E.CPU
253
E.13
2
Write the parameters copied to the operation panel to the destination inverter.
3
Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel.
55K or lower
75K or higher
10
100
Pr.989 setting
PCPY
Setting
0
Description
 Using Pr.CH Initial value change list, only the parameters changed
from the initial value can be displayed.
* Parameters are not cleared when "1" is set in Pr.77 Parameter write selection.
Pr.
Buzzer control of the operation panel
990
Pr.990 PU buzzer control
You can make the buzzer "beep" when you press key of the
operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FRPU07).
Pr.990 Setting
0
Pr.
991
Description
Without buzzer
1(initial value)
With buzzer
PU contrast adjustment
Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/
FR-PU07) can be performed.
Decreasing the setting value makes the contrast lighter.
Pr.991 Setting
0 to 63
Pr.997
Setting
Fault
16
17
Pr. 998, IPM
Description
0 : Light

63 : Dark
Refer to page 92
Pr. 999, AUTO
Automatic parameter setting
Pr.999 Automatic parameter setting
AUTO Automatic parameter setting
Parameter settings are changed as a batch. Those include
communication parameter settings for the Mitsubishi human
machine interface (GOT) connection, rated frequency settings of
50Hz/60Hz, and acceleration/deceleration time increment
settings.
Multiple parameters are changed automatically. Users do not
have to consider each parameter number. (Parameter setting
mode)
Pr.999
setting
9999
(Initial
value)
Pr.991 PU contrast adjustment
63
997
Description
Operation in the
parameter setting
mode (
)
No action
—
10
Automatically sets the communication
parameters for the GOT connection
with a PU connector
"AUTO" "GOT" 
Write "1"
11
Automatically sets the communication
parameters for the GOT connection
with RS-485 terminals
—
20
50Hz rated
frequency
"AUTO" "F50" 
Write "1"
21
60Hz rated
frequency
30
0.1s
increment
31
0.01s
increment
When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions.
Sets the related
parameters of the rated
frequency according to
the power supply
frequency
Changes the setting
increments of
acceleration/
deceleration time
parameters without
changing acceleration/
deceleration settings
—
—
"AUTO" "T0.01" 
Write "1"
Protective Functions
Appears during overcurrent stall prevention.
Appears during overvoltage stall prevention
Appears while the regeneration avoidance function is activated.
Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 "Special
regenerative brake duty" value. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a
regenerative overvoltage (E. OV_) occurs. (displayed only for the 75K or higher)
Appears when the electronic thermal O/L relay has reached 85% of the specified
value.
Stall prevention stop
Loss of synchronism
detection *8
Appears when an overcurrent occurred during acceleration.
Appears when an overcurrent occurred during constant speed operation.
Appears when an overcurrent occurred during deceleration and at a stop.
Appears when an overvoltage occurred during acceleration.
Appears when an overvoltage occurred during constant speed operation.
Appears when the electronic thermal relay function for inverter element protection
was activated.
Appears when the electronic thermal relay function for motor protection was
activated.
Appears when the heatsink overheated.
Appears when an instantaneous power failure occurred at an input power supply.
Appears when the main circuit DC voltage became low.
Appears if one of the three phases on the inverter input side opened.
Appears when the output frequency drops to 0.5Hz (1.5Hz under IPM motor control)
due to the deceleration with an overloaded motor.
Protective
Functions
Appears when an overvoltage occurred during deceleration and at a stop.
Options
Overcurrent trip during
acceleration
Overcurrent trip during
constant speed
Overcurrent trip during
deceleration or stop
Regenerative overvoltage
trip during acceleration
Regenerative overvoltage trip
during constant speed
Regenerative overvoltage trip
during deceleration or stop
Inverter overload trip
(electronic thermal relay
function) *1
Motor overload trip
(electronic thermal relay
function) *1
Heatsink overheat
Instantaneous power failure
Undervoltage
Input phase loss *7
Appears when the cooling fan remains stopped when operation is required or when
the speed has decreased.
Instructions
Fan alarm
Appears when
on the operation panel was pressed during external operation.
Appears when the cumulative energization time has exceeded the maintenance
output timer set value.
Appears when parameters are copied between models with capacities of 55K or
lower and 75K or higher.
Appears when the operation is not synchronized.
This function stops the inverter output if an alarm occurs in the brake circuit, e.g.
Brake transistor alarm
damaged brake transistors. In this case, the inverter must be powered off
detection/internal circuit fault
immediately. (Internal circuit error for the model 55K or lower)
Output side earth (ground)
Appears when an earth (ground) fault occurred on the inverter's output side.
fault overcurrent
Output phase loss
Appears if one of the three phases on the inverter output side opened.
External thermal relay
Appears when the external thermal relay connected to the terminal OH operated.
operation *6, *7
Appears when the motor overheat status is detected for 10s or more by the external
PTC thermistor operation *7
PTC thermistor input connected to the terminal AU.
Appears when an alarm occurred in the option card or an AC power supply is connected
Option fault
to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when the high power factor converter connection is set.
Communication option fault Appears when a communication error occurred in the communication option.
Option fault
Appears when a functional error occurred in the plug-in option.
Parameter storage device
Appears when operation of the element where parameters are stored became
fault
abnormal. (control circuit board)
Motor
PU stop
IPM
motor control
Electronic thermal relay
function pre-alarm *1
Compatibility
Regenerative brake
prealarm *7
Connection
example
Appears when the RES signal is on or the PU and inverter can not make normal communication.
Stall prevention (overcurrent)
Stall prevention
(overvoltage)
Standard
Specifications
Error
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
to
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
Appears when an error occurs at parameter copying.
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Copy operation error
Parameter
List
to
Explanations
of
Parameters
Appears when an error occurs at parameter writing.
Parameter copy
Alarm*4
Indication
Parameter write error
Maintenance signal output *7
Fault *5
Description
Appears when operation is tried during operation panel lock.
Appears when a password restricted parameter is read/written.
Warranty
Warnings *3
Error message *2
Function Name
Operation panel lock
Password locked
Features
When an alarm occurs in the inverter, the protective function is activated bringing the inverter to an alarm stop and the PU
display automatically changes to any of the following error (alarm) indications.
64
Function Name
Description
Retry count excess *7
Parameter storage device
fault
Appears when a communication error between the PU and inverter occurred, the
communication interval exceeded the permissible time during the RS-485
communication with the PU connecter, or communication errors exceeded the
number of retries during the RS-485 communication.
Appears when the operation was not restarted within the set number of retries.
Appears when operation of the element where parameters stored became
abnormal. (main circuit board)
CPU fault
Appears during the CPU and peripheral circuit errors.
PU disconnection
Indication
Fault *5
to
RS-485 terminal power
supply short circuit
24VDC power output short
circuit
Output current detection
value exceeded *7
Inrush current limit circuit
fault
Communication fault
(inverter)
Analog input fault
Overspeed occurrence *7, *8
PID signal fault
Internal circuit fault
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
65
Appears when the RS-485 terminal power supply was shorted.
Appears when terminals PC-SD were shorted.
Appears when output current exceeded the output current detection level set by the
parameter.
Appears when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheated.
Appears when a communication error occurred during the RS-485 communication
with the RS-485 terminals.
Stops the inverter output when a 30mA or higher current or a 7.5V or higher voltage
is input to terminal 2 while the current input is selected by Pr. 73 Analog input
selection, or to terminal 4 while the current input is selected by Pr.267 Terminal 4 input
selection.
Stops the inverter outputs when the motor speed exceeds the Pr. 374 Overspeed
detection level under IPM motor control.
Appears when any of during PID control, PID upper limit (FUP), PID lower limit
(FDN), and PID deviation limit (Y48) turns ON during PID control.
Appears when an internal circuit error occurred.
Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the electronic thermal relay function.
The error message shows an operational error. The inverter output is not shut off.
Warnings are messages given before faults occur. The inverter output is not shut off.
Alarm warn the operator of failures with output signals. The inverter output is not shut off.
When faults occur, the protective functions are activated to shut off the inverter output and output the alarms.
The external thermal operates only when the OH signal is set in Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).
This protective function is not available in the initial status.
This function is available only under IPM motor control.
/
Option and Peripheral Devices
By fitting the following options to the inverter, the inverter is provided with more functions.
One plug-in option can be fitted.
 This option allows the inverter to be operated or monitored
or the parameter setting to be changed from a computer or
PLC.
FR-A7ND
* For the FR-A7NC (CC-Link), the above operations can be done from the PLC
only.
Parameter unit with battery pack
FR-PU07BB(-L)
Parameter unit connection cable
FR-CB20
Operation panel connection
connector
FR-ADP
Enables parameter setting without supplying power to the
inverter.
Cable for connection of operation panel or parameter unit
 indicates a cable length. (1m, 3m, 5m)
Connector to connect the operation panel (FR-DU07) and
connection cable
FR-A7CN
FR-AAT
Attachment for replacing with the FR-F700P series using the
installation holes of the FR-F500.
FR-A5AT
Attachment for replacing with the FR-F700P series using the
installation holes of the FR-A100<Excellent> and FRA200<Excellent>
AC reactor
FR-HAL
DC reactor
FR-HEL
For harmonic current reduction and inverter input power
factor improvement
FR-BU2
FR-BR
For increasing the braking capability of the inverter (for high
inertia load or negative load)
Brake unit and resistor unit are used in combination
MT-BR5
Power regeneration converter
Connection
example
Standard
Specifications
Interactive parameter unit with LCD display
The inverter heatsink section can be protruded outside of the
rear of the enclosure.
Intercompatibility
attachment
Power regeneration common
converter
Dedicated stand-alone reactor
for the FR-CV
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
FR-A7NF
FR-CV
FR-CVL
MT-RC
Shared among all
models
FR-F720P-2.2K to
110K
FR-F740P-0.75K
to 160K
According to
capacities
According to
capacities
For the 55K or
lower
According to
capacities
For the 55K or
lower
For the 75K or
higher
Unit which can return motor-generated braking energy back
to the power supply in common converter system
For the 55K or
lower
Energy saving type high performance brake unit which can
regenerate the braking energy generated by the motor to the
power supply.
For the 75K or
higher
Explanations
of
Parameters
Parameter
List
FR-A7NP
FR-PU07
FR-PU04
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
FR-A7NL
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
FR-A7NCE
Parameter unit (Eight languages)
Brake unit
Resistor unit
Shared among all
models
Protective
Functions
CC-Link IE Field Network
communication
LONWORKS
communication
DeviceNet
communication
PROFIBUS-DP
communication
FL remote
communication
FR-A7NC
Options
CC-Link communication
Instructions
FR-A7AR
Motor
Relay output
IPM
motor control
FR-A7AY
 This input interface sets the high frequency accuracy of the
inverter using an external BCD or binary digital signal.
BCD code 3 digits (maximum 999)
BCD code 4 digits (maximum 9999)
Binary 12 bits (maximum FFFH)
Binary 16 bits (maximum FFFFH)
 This option provides the inverter with open collector outputs
selected from among the standard output signals.
 This option adds two different signals that can be
monitored at the terminals FM and AM, such as the output
frequency, output voltage and output current.
 20mADC or 5VDC (10V) meter can be connected.
 Output any three output signals available with the inverter
as standard from the relay contact terminals
Applicable
Inverter
Compatibility
Digital output
Extension analog output
Applications, Specifications, etc.
Warranty
FR-A7AX
Heatsink protrusion
attachment
Stand-alone Shared
Type
16-bit digital input
Communication
Plug-in Type
Name
Features
Options
66
Others
FR Series Manual Controller/Speed Controller
Type
Applications, Specifications, etc.
Applicable
Inverter
High power factor converter
FR-HC2
The high power factor converter switches the converter
section on/off to reshape an input current waveform into a
sine wave, greatly suppressing harmonics. (Used in
combination with the standard accessory.)
According to
capacities
Line noise filter
FR-BSF01
FR-BLF
For line noise reduction
Shared among all
models
Surge voltage suppression
filter
FR-ASF
FR-BMF
Filter for suppressing surge voltage on motor
For 400V class
55K or lower
Reduces the motor noise during inverter driving
Use in combination with a reactor and a capacitor
For the 75K or
higher
Sine wave
filter
Stand-alone Shared
Name
Reactor
Capacitor
MT-BSL
MT-BSC
For independent operation. With frequency meter, frequency
setting potentiometer and start switch.
For synchronous operation (1VA) by external signal (0 to 5V,
0 to 10V DC)
For three speed switching, among high, middle and low
speed operation (1.5VA)
For remote operation. Allows operation to be controlled from
several places (5VA)
For ratio operation. Allows ratios to be set to five inverters.
(3VA)
For tracking operation by a pilot generator (PG) signal (3VA)
Master controller (5VA) for parallel operation of multiple
(maximum 35) inverters.
For soft start and stop. Enables acceleration/deceleration in
parallel operation (3VA)
For continuous speed control operation. Used in combination
with a deviation sensor or synchro (5VA)
Manual controller
FR-AX
DC tach. follower
FR-AL
Three speed selector
FR-AT
Motorized speed setter
FR-FK
Ratio setter
FR-FH
PG follower
FR-FP
Master controller
FR-FG
Soft starter
FR-FC
Deviation detector
FR-FD
Preamplifier
FR-FA
Used as an A/V converter or arithmetic amplifier (3VA)
Pilot generator
QVAH-10
Deviation sensor
YVGC-500W-NS
For tracking operation. 70V/35VAC 500Hz (at 2500r/min)
For continuous speed control operation (mechanical
deviation detection). Output 90VAC/90°
Frequency setting
potentiometer
WA2W 1k
Frequency meter
YM206NRI 1mA
Calibration resistor
RV24YN 10k
FR Configurator
(Inverter setup software)
FR-SW3-SETUPWE
Shared among all
models
For frequency setting. Wirewound 2W 1k B characteristic
Dedicated frequency meter (graduated to 120Hz). Movingcoil type DC ammeter
For frequency meter calibration. Carbon film type B
characteristic
Supports an inverter startup to maintenance.
Shared among all
models
* Rated power consumption. The power supply specifications of the FR series manual controllers and speed controllers are 200VAC 50Hz, 220V/220VAC
60Hz, and 115VAC 60Hz.
67
Stand-alone option
Features
Specification and Structure
 Allows the heatsink, which is the exothermic section of the inverter, to be protruded outside the
enclosure. Since the heat generated in the inverter can be radiated to the rear of the enclosure,
the enclosure size can be downsized.
Enclosure
Inside the enclosure
 Refer to page 21 for the enclosure cut dimensions.
Inverter
Cooling fan
FR-F740P-0.75K to 5.5K
FR-F740P-7.5K, 11K
FR-F740P-15K, 18.5K
FR-F740P-22K, 30K
—
FR-F740P-37K
FR-F740P-45K, 55K, 75K
FR-F740P-90K
FR-F740P-110K
FR-F740P-132K, 160K
Inverter
FR-AAT
FR-A5AT
[Models replaceable with FR-F720P]
FR-F720P
15K
18.5K to
30K
37K
45K/55K
FR-A5AT01
—
—
—
—
—
—
FR-A5AT02
FR-A5AT02
—
—
—
—
—
—
FR-A5AT03
FR-A5AT03
—
—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT02
FR-AAT24

—
—
—
—
—
FR-A5AT04
FR-A5AT04
—
—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT27

—
—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT23

—
—
—
—
—
—
FR-A5AT05

—
—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT21

—
—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT22

—
—
—
—
—
FR-A5AT03
FR-A5AT03
—
—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT02
FR-AAT24

—
—
—
—
—
FR-A5AT04
FR-A5AT04
—
—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT27

—
—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT23

—
—
—
—
—
—
FR-A5AT05
Parameter
List
Conventional model and capacity
FRF520
7.5K/11K
—
—
37K
—
45K/55K
—
FR-A5AT03
FR-A5AT03
—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT02
FR-AAT24
—
—
—
—
—
FR-A5AT04
FR-A5AT04
—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT27
—
—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT23

—
—
—
—
—
FR-A5AT05

—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT22

—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT02
FR-AAT24

—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT27

—
—
—
—
—
FR-AAT23

: Replaceable without the intercompatibility attachment
FR-A5AT, FR-AAT: Replaceable with the intercompatibility attachment.
Motor
—
IPM
motor control
FR-A5AT02
Compatibility
7.5K/11K
Warranty
0.75K to 3.7K
5.5K to 11K
15K/18.5K
FR22K
A140E
30K
37K/45K
55K
0.75K to 3.7K
5.5K to 11K
FR15K to 22K
F540
30K/37K
45K/55K
FR-F740P
15K/18.5K
22K/30K
0.75K to 5.5K
Instructions
[Models replaceable with FR-F740P]
Conventional model and capacity
Intercompatibility
attachment
FR-AAT
FR-A5AT
FRA120E
0.75K
1.5K to 3.7K
5.5K to 11K
15K/18.5K
22K/30K
37K
45K
55K
0.75K
1.5K to 3.7K
5.5K/7.5K
11K
15K to 22K
30K
37K
45K
55K
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
Cooling wind
 Intercompatibility attachment
Enables FR-F700P to be attached using the mounting holes made for the conventional FR-F500/A100E
series inverter. This attachment is useful when replacing a conventional inverter with FR-F700P.
* The inverter with this attachment requires greater installation depth.
0.75K/1.5K 2.2K to 5.5K
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
Heatsink
Explanations
of
Parameters
FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K
FR-F720P-15K
FR-F720P-18.5K to 30K
FR-F720P-37K
—
FR-F720P-45K, 55K
—
—
FR-F720P-75K to 110K
12
FR-A7CN01
FR-A7CN02
FR-A7CN03
FR-A7CN04
FR-A7CN05
FR-A7CN06
FR-A7CN07
FR-A7CN08
FR-A7CN09
FR-A7CN10
Protective
Functions
Applicable Inverter
200V class
400V class
Model
Heatsink protrusion
attachment
FR-A7CN
Standard
Specifications
Connection
example
FR-A7CN
(Option)
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
 This attachment requires larger attachment area. Refer to the dimension of the inverter with the
attachment (on page 21).
Options
Name (model)
68
Name (model)
Specification and Structure
 Improves the power factor and reduces the harmonic current at the input side. Connect an AC reactor at the input side of the inverter.
 Selection method
Select an AC reactor according to the applied motor capacity. (Select the AC reactor according to the motor capacity even if the capacity is smaller than the inverter
capacity.)
 Connection diagram
Inverter
FR-HAL
Three-phase AC
power supply
R
X
S
Y
T
Z
R/L1
U
Motor
S/L2
V
M
T/L3
W
 Outline dimension
(Unit: mm)
69
0.4K
0.75K
1.5K
2.2K
3.7K
5.5K
7.5K
11K
15K
18.5K
22K
30K
37K
45K
55K
75K
110K
W W1 H
104
104
104
115
115
115
130
160
160
160
185
185
210
210
210
240
330
84
84
84
40
40
40
50
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
150
170
99
99
99
115
115
115
135
164
167
128
150
150
175
175
175
210
325
D
D1
d
Mass
(kg)
72
74
77
77
83
83
100
111
126
175
158
168
174
191
201
215.5
259
40
44
50
57
67
67
86
92
107
107
87
87
82
97
97
109
127
M5
M5
M5
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M8
M10
0.6
0.8
1.1
1.5
2.2
2.3
4.2
5.2
7.0
7.1
9.0
9.7
12.9
16.4
17.4
23
40
Model
400V
AC reactor
(for power supply
coordination)
FR-HAL-(H)K
200V
Model
H0.4K
H0.75K
H1.5K
H2.2K
H3.7K
H5.5K
H7.5K
H11K
H15K
H18.5K
H22K
H30K
H37K
H45K
H55K
H75K
H110K
H185K
H280K
H355K
H560K
W W1 H
135
135
135
135
135
160
160
160
220
220
220
220
220
280
280
210
240
330
330
330
450
120
120
120
120
120
145
145
145
200
200
200
200
200
255
255
75
150
170
170
170
300
115
115
115
115
115
142
142
146
195
215
215
215
214
245
245
170
225
325
325
325
540
D
D1
d
64
64
64
64
74
76
96
96
105
170
170
170
170
165
170
210.5
220
271
321
346
635
45
45
45
45
57
55
75
75
70
70
70
75
100
80
90
105
99
142
192
192
345
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M5
M5
M5
M5
M5
M6
M6
M6
M8
M10
M10
M10
M12
Mass
(kg)
Less than D
1.5
H
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
3.5
5.0
D1
W1
6.0
W
9.0
9.0 (Note)1.Approximately 88% of the power factor
improving effect can be obtained (92.3% when
9.5
calculated with 1 power factor for the
11
fundamental wave according to the
12.5
Architectural Standard Specifications (Electrical
Installation) (2010 revision) supervised by the
15
Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and
18
Tourism of Japan).
20
2. This is a sample outline dimension drawing.
The shape differs by the model.
28
W1 and D1 indicate distances between
55
installation holes. The installation hole size is
80
indicated by d.
90
3. When installing an AC reactor (FR-HAL), install
in the orientation shown below.
190
 (H)55K or lower: Horizontal installation or
vertical installation
 (H)75K or higher: Horizontal installation
4. Keep enough clearance around the reactor
because it heats up.
(Keep a clearance of minimum 10cm each on
top and bottom and minimum 5cm each on
right and left regardless of the installation
orientation.)
Name (model)
Specification and Structure


Select a DC reactor according to the applied motor capacity. (Select it according to the motor capacity even if the capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity.)
The 75K or higher DC reactors come with the corresponding inverters. (Refer to page 12.)

Connect a DC reactor to the inverter terminals P1 and P. Before connecting, make sure to remove the jumper across the terminals P1 and P. (If the jumper
is left attached, no power factor improvement can be obtained.)
The connection cable between the reactor and the inverter should be as short as possible (5m or less).
 Connection diagram

FR-HEL
P1
P
Remove a jumper
across terminals P1-P.
P1
P/+
Standard
Specifications
The connection cable should be
5m maximum.
N/Motor
Three-phase
AC power supply
R/L1
U
S/L2
V
T/L3
W
Connection
example
 Selection method
Features
 Improves the power factor and reduces the harmonic current at the input side. Connect a DC reactor in the DC section of the inverter.
M
Less than D
Mass
(kg)
70 60 71 61 — M4 0.4
H0.4K 90 75 78 60 — M5 0.6
85 74 81 61 — M4 0.5
H0.75K 66 50 100 70 48 M4 0.8
85 74 81 70 — M4 0.8
H1.5K 66 50 100 80 54 M4 1
85 74 81 70 — M4 0.9
H2.2K 76 50 110 80 54 M4 1.3
77 55 92 82 57 M4 1.5
H3.7K 86 55 120 95 69 M4 2.3
77 55 92 92 67 M4 1.9
H5.5K 96 60 128 100 75 M5 3
86 60 113 98 72 M4 2.5
H7.5K 96 60 128 105 80 M5 3.5
105 64 133 112 79 M6 3.3
H11K 105 75 137 110 85 M5 4.5
105 64 133 115 84 M6 4.1
H15K 105 75 152 125 95 M5 5
105 64 93 165 94 M6 4.7
H18.5K 114 75 162 120 80 M5 5
105 64 93 175 104 M6 5.6
H22K 133 90 178 120 75 M5 6
114 72 100 200 101 M6 7.8
H30K 133 90 178 120 80 M5 6.5
133 86 117 195 98 M6 10
H37K 133 90 187 155 100 M5 8.5
133 86 117 205 108 M6 11
H45K 133 90 187 170 110 M5 10
153 126 132 209 122 M6 12.6
H55K 152 105 206 170 106 M6 11.5
The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/
L3). (Refer to page 78.)
Approximately 93% of the power factor improving effect can be obtained (94.4% when calculated with 1
power factor for the fundamental wave according to the Architectural Standard Specifications (Electrical
Installation) (2010 revision) supervised by the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism of
Japan).
This is a sample outline dimension drawing. The shape differs by the model.
W1 and D1 indicate distances between installation holes. The installation hole size is indicated by d.
When installing a DC reactor (FR-HEL), install in the orientation shown below.
(H)55K or lower: Horizontal installation or vertical installation
(H)75K or higher: Horizontal installation
Keep enough clearance around the reactor because it heats up.
(Keep a clearance of minimum 10cm each on top and bottom and minimum 5cm each on right and left
regardless of the installation orientation.)
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
d
H
W1
W
FR-HEL-0.4K to 2.2K
FR-HEL-H0.4K
Parameter
List
Less than D
H
W
D1
W1
FR-HEL-3.7K to 55K
FR-HEL-H0.75K to H55K
Explanations
of
Parameters
D1
Protective
Functions
D
Options
W W1 H
Instructions
4.


5.
Model
Motor
3.
Mass
(kg)
IPM
motor control
2.
d
Compatibility
(Note)1.
D1
Warranty
0.4K
0.75K
1.5K
2.2K
3.7K
5.5K
7.5K
11K
15K
18.5K
22K
30K
37K
45K
55K
D
400V
200V
DC reactor
(for power supply
coordination)
FR-HEL-(H)K
W W1 H
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
(Unit: mm)
Model
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
Inverter
 Outline dimension
70
Name (model)
Specification and Structure
 Provides a braking capability greater than that is provided by an external brake resistor. This option can also be connected to the inverters without built-in
brake transistors. Three types of discharging resistors are available. Make a selection according to the required braking torque.
 Specification
[Brake unit]
200V
400V
7.5K
15K 30K 55K H7.5K H15K
H30K
H55K H75K H220K H280K
Applicable motor capacity
The applicable capacity differs by the braking torque and the operation rate (%ED).
Connected brake resistor
GRZG type, FR-BR, MT-BR5 (For the combination, refer to the table below.)
MT-BR5 *
Multiple (parallel) driving
Max. 10 units (However, the torque is limited by the permissible current of the connected inverter.)
Approximate mass (kg)
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.4
2.0
0.9
0.9
1.4
2.0
2.0
13
13
*
Please contact your sales representative to use a brake resistor other than MT-BR5.
Model FR-BU2-
1.5K
3.7K
[Resistor unit]
Model GRZG type
GRZG200-10
400V
GRZG300-5
GRZG400-2
4 in series
6 in series
6 in series
8 in series
12 in series
30
20
12
60
40
24
300
600
1200
600
1200
2400
GRZG200-10
1 unit
3 in series
50
100
Number of connectable
units
Discharging resistor
combined resistance ()
Continuous operation
permissible power (W)
Model FR-BR-
Brake unit
FR-BU2-(H)K
GRZG400-2
GZG300W-50
200V
30K
15K
Discharging resistor
combined resistance ()
Continuous operation
permissible power (W)
Approximate mass (kg)
200V
GRZG300-5
55K
H15K
400V
H30K
H55K
8
4
2
32
16
8
990
1990
3910
990
1990
3910
15
30
70
15
30
70
Model (MT-BR5-)
Discharging resistor
combined resistance ()
Continuous operation
permissible power (W)
Approximate mass (kg)
200V
55K
400V
H75K
2
6.5
5500
7500
50
70
 Combination between the brake unit and the resistor unit
Discharging resistor model or resistor unit model
Brake unit model
Resistor unit
FR-BR-(H)K
MT-BR5-(H)K
200V
class
Discharging resistor
GZG type
GRZG type
GRZG type
FR-BR
FR-BU2-1.5K
GZG 300W-50 (1 unit)
—
—
FR-BU2-3.7K
GRZG 200-10 (3 in parallel)
—
—
FR-BU2-7.5K
GRZG 300-5 (4 in parallel)
—
—
FR-BU2-15K
GRZG 400-2(6 in parallel)
FR-BR-15K
—
FR-BU2-30K
—
FR-BR-30K
—
FR-BU2-55K
400V
class
*
MT-BR5
—
FR-BR-55K
MT-BR5-55K
FR-BU2-H7.5K
GRZG 200-10 (6 in parallel)
—
—
FR-BU2-H15K
GRZG 300-5 (8 in parallel)
FR-BR-H15K
—
FR-BU2-H30K
GRZG 400-2 (12 in parallel)
FR-BR-H30K
—
FR-BU2-H55K
—
FR-BR-H55K
—
FR-BU2-H75K
—
—
MT-BR5-H75K
FR-BU2-H220K
—
—
3 MT-BR5-H75K *
FR-BU2-H280K
—
—
4 MT-BR5-H75K *
The number next to the model name indicates the number of connectable units in parallel.
 Selection method
[GRZG type]

The maximum temperature rise of the discharging resistors is about 100°C. Use heat-resistant wires to perform wiring, and make sure that they will not
come in contact with resistors.
Power
Motor (kW)
supply
voltage Braking torque
50% 30s
200V
class
400V
class
*1
*2
71
100% 30s
0.75
1.5
FR-BU2-1.5K
2.2
3.7
FR-BU2-3.7K
FR-BU2- FR-BU2FR-BU2-7.5K
1.5K
3.7K
50% 30s
— *2
100% 30s
— *2
5.5
7.5
FR-BU2-7.5K
11
15
FR-BU2-15K
FR-BU2-15K 2 FR-BU2-15K *1
FR-BU2-H7.5K
FR-BU2FR-BU2-H15K
H7.5K
FR-BU2-H15K
FR-BU2-H30K
18.5
22
30
2 FR-BU2-15K *1
4 FRBU215K *1
FR-BU2-H30K
3 FR-BU215K *1
2 FR-BU2-H30K *1
37
45
55
3 FR-BU2-15K 4 FR-BU2*1
15K *1
5 FR6 FR7 FRBU2BU2BU215K *1
15K *1
15K *1
2 FR-BU2-H30K *1
3 FR-BU2-H30K 4 FR-BU2H30K *1
*1
The number next to the model name indicates the number of connectable units in parallel.
The 400V class 1.5K or lower capacity inverters cannot be used with brake units. When using brake units with inverters, use 2.2K or higher capacity
inverters.
Name (model)
Specification and Structure
[FR-BR]
Features
The maximum temperature rise of the resistor unit is about 100°C. Therefore, use heat-resistant wires (such as glass wires).
FR-BU2-55K
FR-BU2-H15K
400V
%ED
FR-BU2-H30K
FR-BU2-H55K
15kW
10
30
-----10
30
------
18.5kW
-----25
90
-----25
90
22kW
-----15
60
-----15
60
30kW
-----10
30
-----10
30
37kW
----------20
----------20
45kW
----------15
----------15
55kW
----------10
----------10
11kW
120
260
-----120
260
------
15kW
100
180
-----100
180
------
18.5kW
80
160
300
80
160
300
22kW
70
130
250
70
130
250
30kW
-----100
180
-----100
180
37kW
-----80
150
-----80
150
45kW
-----70
120
-----70
120
55kW
----------100
----------100
FR-BU2-30K
FR-BU2-55K
FR-BU2-H15K
400V
Braking
torque
(%)
FR-BU2-H30K
FR-BU2-H55K
5.5kW
280
----------280
-----------
7.5kW
200
----------200
-----------
Regeneration duty factor (operation frequency)%ED
Example 1 Travel operation
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
200V
Braking
torque
(%)
tb
tb<15s (continuous operation time)
100
tc
Example 2 Lift operation
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
Motor capacity
FR-BU2-15K
Standard
Specifications
Braking torque (%) at 10%ED in short-time rating of 15s(%)
Speed
Brake unit
FR-BU2-(H)K
tc
t1
tc
t2 t3
t4
tb=t1+t2+t3+t4
[MT-BR5]

Be sure to select a well-ventilated place for the installation of the resistor unit. Ventilation is necessary when installing the resistor in a place such as
enclosure, where heat is not well diffused.
 The maximum temperature rise of the resistor unit is about 300deg. When wiring, be careful not to touch the resistor. Also, keep any heat-sensitive
component away from the resistor (minimum 40 to 50cm).
 The temperature of the resistor unit abnormally increases if the brake unit is operated exceeding the specified duty. Since the resistor unit may result in
overheat if the temperature of the brake unit is left unchanged, switch off the inverter.
 A resistor unit is equipped with thermostat (NO contact) for overheat protection. If this protective thermostat activates in normal operation, the deceleration
time may be too short. Set the inverter's deceleration time longer.
%ED at short-time rating when braking torque is 100%
Motor capacity
Number of
75kW 90kW 110kW 132kW 160kW 185kW 220kW 250kW 280kW 315kW 355kW 375kW 400kW 450kW 500kW 560kW
connectable units*1
1
5
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
200V class
FR-BU2-55K
2
20
15
10
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
10
5
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
400V class
FR-BU2-H75K
2
40
25
20
10
5
5
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
80
60
40
25
15
10
10
5
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
400V class
FR-BU2-H220K
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
20
20
15
15
15
10
10
10
5
—
1
—
80
65
40
30
20
15
10
10
10
5
—
—
—
—
—
400V class
FR-BU2-H280K
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
20
20
15
15
15
10
10
*1
*2
75kW 90kW 110kW 132kW 160kW 185kW 220kW 250kW 280kW 315kW 355kW 375kW 400kW 450kW 500kW 560kW
70
150
100
150
—
—
—
—
60
120
80
150
—
—
—
—
50
100
70
135
150
—
—
—
—
—
55
110
150
—
—
—
—
—
45
90
135
—
150
—
—
—
40
80
115
—
150
—
—
—
35
70
100
—
150
—
—
—
—
60
80
—
125
—
—
—
25
50
55
150
100
—
—
—
—
45
—
150
70
—
—
—
—
40
—
140
—
—
The number next to the model name indicates the number of connectable units in parallel.
To obtain a large braking torque, the motor has to have a torque characteristic that meets the braking torque.
Check the torque characteristic of the motor.
—
—
20
40
—
120
—
150
—
—
—
—
—
110
—
150
—
—
—
—
—
100
—
130
—
—
—
—
—
90
—
115
—
—
—
—
—
80
—
100
Motor
Motor capacity
Number of
connectable units*1
1
200V class
FR-BU2-55K
2
1
400V class
FR-BU2-H75K
2
1
400V class
FR-BU2-H220K
2
1
400V class
FR-BU2-H280K
2
Instructions
Braking torque (%) in short-time rating of 15s(%)
IPM
motor control
Discharging resistor
GZG type
GRZG type
Time t
Compatibility
Resistor unit
FR-BR-(H)K
MT-BR5-(H)K
tb
Descending
Time t
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Speed
Ascending
Parameter
List
%ED
FR-BU2-30K
11kW
15
65
-----15
65
------
Explanations
of
Parameters
200V
7.5kW
40
----------40
-----------
Protective
Functions
5.5kW
80
----------80
-----------
Options
Motor capacity
FR-BU2-15K
Connection
example
%ED at short-time rating when braking torque is 100%
Warranty

72
Name (model)
Specification and Structure
 Connection diagram
ON
OFF
T *3
MC
Resistor unit or
discharging resistor
MC
MCCB
Inverter
MC
Three-phase
AC power supply
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Motor
U
V
W
Resistor unit or
discharging resistor P
PR
P
PR
M
PR
*2
P/+
N/-
*2
Signal for
master/slave
*2
*3
A jumper is connected across BUE and SD in the
initial status.
When wiring, make sure to match the terminal
symbol (P/+, N/-) at the inverter side and at the
brake unit (FR-BU2) side. Incorrect connection will
damage the inverter.
Do not remove the jumper across terminal P/+ and
P1 except for connecting the DC reactor.
When the power supply is 400V class, install a
step-down transformer.
A
B
C
P/+
N/-
*2
RES
BUE *1
SD
MSG
SD
MSG
SD
Reset
Brake permission signal
*1
PR
A
B
C
P/+
N/-
RES
BUE *1
SD
MSG
SD
MSG
SD
Brake unit
FR-BU2
Brake unit
FR-BU2
When connecting
several brake units
 Outline dimensions
[FR-BU2]
(Unit: mm)
H
H
Model
Brake unit
FR-BU2-(H)K
Resistor unit
FR-BR-(H)K
MT-BR5-(H)K
W
D
FR-BU2-1.5K to 55K
FR-BU2-H7.5K to H75K
H
D
68
108
170
68
108
170
250
128
128
128
128
128
128
300
132.5
129.5
142.5
132.5
129.5
142.5
200
D
FR-BU2-H220K, H280K
[GZG, GRZG]
(Unit: mm)
H
Discharging resistor
GZG type
GRZG type
W
FR-BU2-1.5K to 15K
FR-BU2-30K
FR-BU2-55K
FR-BU2-H7.5K, H15K
FR-BU2-H30K
FR-BU2-H55K, H75K
FR-BU2-H220K, H280K
W
W
Model
W
H
D
GZG300W
335
78
40
GRZG200
306
55
26
GRZG300
334
79
40
GRZG400
411
79
40
D
[FR-BR]
D
(Unit: mm)
H
W
85
[MT-BR5]
800
NP
85
M4
30
TH2
P PR TH1 E
40
M6
193
189
37
60 10 21
480
510
75
4φ 15 installation hole
73
7.5
300
450
75
7.5
Model
W
H
D
FR-BR-15K
FR-BR-30K
FR-BR-55K
FR-BR-H15K
FR-BR-H30K
FR-BR-H55K
170
340
480
170
340
480
450
600
700
450
600
700
220
220
450
220
220
450
Specification and Structure
 Enables continuous regenerative operation at 100% torque. This option can support
continuous regenerative operations including line operation.
 This converter eliminates the need of preparing brake units per inverter. This converter can
cut down the total space and the cost.
 The regenerated energy is used by another inverter, and if there is still an excess, it is
returned to the power supply, saving on the energy consumption.
FR-CV-(H)
FR-CV-(H)-AT
 Connection diagram
H
*5
*6
303
305
322
250
103
105
122
135
H
D
D1
FR-CV-(H)-AT
Voltage/
capacity
7.5K/11K
15K
22K/30K
W
110 330 315 115
130 330 320 120
160 410 350 150
H
D
Connection
example
D1
120 300 305 105
150 380 305 105
400 620 250 135
(Unit: mm)
Voltage/
W
H
D D1
capacity
7.5K/11K/
130 330 320 120
15K
22K/30K 160 410 350 150
FR-CVL
D
H
Standard
Specifications
300
300
380
620
W
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
90
120
150
400
Voltage/
capacity
7.5K/11K/
15K
22K/30K
37K/55K
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
D1
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
*4
Remove jumpers between terminal R/L1 and R/L11as well as between S/L2 and S1/L21,
and connect the power supply for the control circuit to terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21. Do
not connect anything to power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). Incorrect connection will
damage the inverter. Connecting the opposite polarity of terminals N/- and P/+ will
damage the inverter.
Do not insert an MCCB between the terminals P/+ and N/- (between terminals P/L+ and
P/+ or between N/L- and N/-).
Always match the terminal symbols (P/+, N/-) at the inverter side and at the power
regeneration common converter side. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
Do not remove the jumper across P/+ and P1.
Assign the terminal for X10 signal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function
selection).
Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, and T/MC1. Operating
the inverter without connecting them will damage the power regeneration common
converter.
Install the dedicated stand-alone reactor (FR-CVL) on a horizontal place.
Always connect terminal RDYB of the FR-CV to an inverter terminal where the X10 signal
or the MRS signal is assigned to. Always connect terminal SE of the FR-CV to the inverter
terminal SD. Not connecting these terminals may damage the FR-CV.
D
W
FR-CVL
Voltage/
capacity
7.5K/11K/
15K
22K
30K
37K
55K
*
(Unit: mm)
W
H
D
165 155 130
165
215
220
250
155
175
200
225
140
160
320
335
Voltage/
capacity
7.5K/11K
15K
22K
30K
37K
55K
The maximum dimensions.
W
H
D
220
220
220
245
245
290
200
205
215
220
265
280
135
135
150
185
230
230
Parameter
List
*3
X10 *3
RES
H
Explanations
of
Parameters
*2
*6
(Unit: mm)
W
Protective
Functions
Power regeneration
common converter
FR-CV-(H)K
Voltage/
capacity
7.5K/11K
15K
22K/30K
37K/55K
Options
*1
FR-CV-(H)
Instructions
RDYB
RSO
SE
*2
Motor
PC
SD
D
IPM
motor control
P/+
N/−
P24
SD
RDYA
D1
W
Compatibility
P/L+
N/L−
D
400V
R/L11
S/L21 *4
T/MC1
D1
W
Inverter
400V
R2/L1
S2/L2
T2/L3
W
400V
R2/L12
S2/L22
T2/L32
M
200V
R/L11
S/L21
T/L31
V
200V
Three-phase
AC power
supply
MC1
R1/L11
S1/L21
FR-CV type
Power regeneration
common converter
Motor
200V
Dedicated stand-alone
reactor (FR-CVL) *5
H
*1
U
Warranty
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
MCCB
Features
Name (model)
74
Name (model)
Specification and Structure
 Substantially suppresses power harmonics to realize the equivalent capacity
conversion coefficient K5 = 0 in "the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for
Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage" in Japan.
 The power regeneration function comes standard.
 The common converter driving with several inverters is
possible.
 Specification
Model FR-HC2
(*2)
Applicable inverter
capacity (*1)
200V
7.5K
Rated input current
(A)
*1
*2
30K
400V
H30K
H55K
H75K H110K H160K H220K H280K
H400K
H560K
3.7K to 7.5K to 15K to 30K to 37K to 3.7K to 7.5K to 15K to
7.5K
15K
30K
55K
75K
7.5K
15K
30K
30K to
55K
37K to
75K
200K to
400K
280K to
560K
716
993
Rated input
voltage/frequency
15K
55K
75K
H7.5K H15K
Three-phase 200V to 220V 50Hz
200V to 230V 60Hz
33
61
115
215
55K to
110K
90K to 110K to 160K to
60K
220K
280K
Three-phase 380V to 460V 50/60Hz
278
17
31
57
110
139
203
290
397
506
The total capacity of the connected inverters.
If a high power factor converter (FR-HC2) is purchased, it comes with reactor 1 (FR-HCL21), reactor 2 (FR-HCL22), and an outside box (FR-HCB2).
(If an H280K or higher is purchased, it comes with FR-HCL21, FR-HCL22, FR-HCC2, FR-HCR2, and FR-HCM2.)
 Outline dimension
(Unit: mm)
Voltage
High power factor
converter
FR-HC2-(H)K
Capacity
200V
400V
High power factor
converter FR-HC2
Reactor 1 FR-HCL21 (*1) Reactor 2 FR-HCL22 (*1)
W
H
D
W
H
D
W
H
D
7.5K
220
260
170
132
150
100
237.5
230
140
15K
250
400
190
162
172
126
257.5
260
165
30K
325
550
195
195
210
150
342.5
305
180
55K
370
620
250
210
180
200.5
432.5
380
280
W
H
D
190
320
165
270
450
203
400
450
250
190
320
165
203
75K
465
620
300
240
215
215.5
474
460
280
H7.5K
220
300
190
132
140
100
237.5
220
140
H15K
220
300
190
162
170
126
257.5
260
165
H30K
325
550
195
182
195
101
342.5
300
180
H55K
370
670
250
282.5
245
165
392.5
365
200
270
450
H75K
325
620
250
210
175
210.5
430
395
280
300
350
250
H110K
465
620
300
240
230
220
500
440
370
350
450
380
H160K
498
1010
380
280
295
274.5
560
520
430
H220K
498
1010
380
330
335
289.5
620
620
480
400
450
440
H280K
680
1010
380
330
335
321
690
700
560
—
—
—
H400K
790
1330
440
402
460
550
632
675
705
—
—
—
H560K
790
1330
440
452
545
645
632
720
745
—
—
—
Outside box
High power factor converter
P.CPY PWR
REGEN....... DRIVE
Reactor 1, Reactor 2
FAN
*1
H
H
H
PSCLR
*2
W
D
W
W
75
Outside box FR-HCB2
(*2)
D
D
Install reactors (FR-HCL21 and 22) on a
horizontal surface.
FR-HCB2 is not provided for H280K or higher. A
filter capacitor and inrush current limit resistors
are provided instead.
Name (model)
Specification and Structure
5.5
Rated current (A)
7.5
22
11
17
15
18.5
31
37
22
30
43
150 60s 200 0.5s (inverse-time characteristics)
Rated input AC voltage*2
Three-phase 380 to 480V
MC
Inverter
R
U
S
V
W
T
FR-BMF
X
Y
Z
TH1
120Hz
2kHz or less *3
Protective structure (JEM
1030)
OFF
MC
MC
* Install a step-down transformer.
Open type (IP00)
Cooling system
M
TH0
T*
ON
PWM carrier frequency
Self-cooling
100m or shorter
Approx. mass (kg)
5.5
9.5
Surrounding
air temperature
11.5
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
Maximum wiring length
19
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
Ambient
humidity
90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
Environment
MCCB
323 to 528V
Maximum frequency *2
Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas,
oil mist, dust and dirt)
Atmosphere
Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s2 or less*4 at 10 to
55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
Altitude/
vibration
*1
*2
*3
*4
Threephase
AC power
supply
71
Overload current rating*2
Permissible AC voltage
fluctuation*2
within 100m
37
Indicates the maximum capacity applicable with the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.(IPM motors are not applicable.)
Determined by the specification of the connected inverter (400V class).
Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection to 2kHz or less.
When an inverter has a filter mounted on its back, do not use such an inverter on a moving object or in a place that vibrates (exceeding 1.96m/s2).
 Outline dimension
FR-BMF-H7.5K
FR-BMF-H15K, H22K
230
208
195
150
4-M5
75
45
4-M8
13.5
2- φ 10 hole
260
230
195
180
2- φ 6 hole
100
50 31
Parameter
List
Applicable motor capacity
(kW)1
15
Standard
Specifications
7.5
Connection
example
 Connection diagram
Model FR-BMF-HK
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
 Specification
Features
 Limits surge voltage applied to motor terminals when driving a 400V class motor with an inverter (available only with general-purpose motors).
 Supports FR-F740P-5.5K to 37K.
10
Red White Blue
(U) (V) (W)
Isolation cap color
Main terminal block (M4)
Control terminal block (M3)
10
Crimping terminal: 8-6
Main terminal block (M5)
Control terminal block (M3)
2.3
2.3
2.3
(Unit: mm)
Options
Crimping terminal 5.5-4
10
33
80
420
7.5
6
Protective
Functions
Rating
plate
245
285
380
480
500
457
7.5
370
6
Red White Blue
(U) (V) (W)
Isolation cap color
Motor
 FR-BMF-H37K
245
Earth terminal
(M8)
Rating
plate
Terminal layout
X Y Z
TH0 TH1
12.5
2.3
Red White Blue
(U) (V) (W)
Isolation cap color
Crimping terminal
22-6
10
80
130
Compatibility
550
525
IPM
motor control
2- φ 10 hole
450
Main terminal block (M6)
Warranty
2.3
Terminal layout
TH0 TH1
X Y Z
205
165
Earth terminal
(M6)
60
Earth terminal (M5)
Rating
plate
149.5
Terminal layout
TH0 TH1
X Y Z
325
245
325
340
138
6-M5
Instructions
Surge voltage
suppression filter
FR-BMF-HK
Explanations
of
Parameters
4-M4
Control terminal block (M3)
(Unit: mm)
76
Name (model)
Specification and Structure
 Outline dimension
MCCB
FR-BSF01
FR-BLF
Line noise filter
FR-BSF01
....for small capacities
FR-BLF
φ7
130
(Note)1. Wind each phase for three times (4T) in the same direction.
(The greater the number of turns, the more effective result
is obtained.) When using several line noise filters to make
4T or more, wind the phases (cables) together. Do not use
a different line noise filter for different phases.
2. When the cables are too thick to be winded, run each
cable (phase) through four or more filters installed in
series in one direction.
3. The filter can be used in the same way as the output
side. When using filters at the output side, do not wind
the cable more than 3 times (4T) for each filter because
the filter may overheat.
4. Use FR-BSF01 for small-capacity inverters. A thick
cable of 38mm2 or more is not applicable. For such
cable, use FR-BLF.
5. Do not wind the earthing (grounding) cable.
4.5
2.3
65
80
35
85
65
33
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Line noise
filter
7
22.5
2-φ5
31.5
110
95
Inverter
Power
supply
160
180
 Sine wave filter application
Adjusts the motor voltage and current waveforms to be almost a sine wave. For a 75K or higher capacity inverter, installing it at the output side (available with
general-purpose motors).
A sine wave filter will bring operation characteristic equivalent to the operation with a sign-wave power supply and also will provide the following benefits.
1) Low noise
2) No surge current
3) Small motor losses (for a standard motor)
 Operating condition
The following settings and conditions are required to use a sine wave filter.
1) Set "25" in Pr.72. (The initial value is "2".)
This setting changes the carrier frequency to 2.5kHz. (A sine wave filter is designed on the assumption of 2.5kHz carrier frequency. Always change this
setting.) The operation with Pr.72  "25" setting may damage inverter and the sine wave filter.
2) A sine wave filter can be used for the operation with an inverter output frequency of 60Hz or lower.
It cannot be used for the operation with higher frequency. (Using it with the higher frequency will increases the filter loss.)
3) Use a one-rank higher capacity inverter.*2
4) When a sine wave filter and FR-HC2 are required, use MT-BSL-HC instead.
 Circuit configuration and connection
Motor
capacity
(kW) (*1)
Sine wave filter
U
V
W
FR-F700P
Inverter
(Carrier 2.5kHz)
X
Y
Z
M
Reactor
+
0
-
200V
class
Motor
voltage
Capacitor
(Capacitor)
* Install the filter near the inverter. For a current
capacitor cable, use a cable with size
larger than indicated in the table below
"recommended cable size ".
Inverter output
voltage
wave form
400V
class
Wave form at a
motor terminal
*1
Sine wave filter
MT-BSL-(H)K
MT-BSC-(H)K
Applicable Inverter
(*3)
Capacitor for filter (*2)
75
MT-BSL-75K
1 MT-BSC-75K
FR-F720P-90K
90
MT-BSL-90K
1 MT-BSC-90K
FR-F720P-110K
75
MT-BSL-H75K(-HC)
1 MT-BSC-H75K
FR-F740P-90K
90
MT-BSL-H110K(-HC)
1 MT-BSC-H110K
FR-F740P-110K
FR-F740P-132K
110
MT-BSL-H110K(-HC)
1 MT-BSC-H110K
132
MT-BSL-H150K(-HC)
2 MT-BSC-H75K
FR-F740P-160K
160
MT-BSL-H220K(-HC)
2 MT-BSC-H110K
FR-F740P-185K
185
MT-BSL-H220K(-HC)
2 MT-BSC-H110K
FR-F740P-220K
220
MT-BSL-H220K(-HC)
2 MT-BSC-H110K
FR-F740P-250K
250
MT-BSL-H280K(-HC)
3 MT-BSC-H110K
FR-F740P-280K
280
MT-BSL-H280K(-HC)
3 MT-BSC-H110K
FR-F740P-315K
Only general-purpose motors (three-phase induction motors) are
applicable. IPM motors are not applicable.
When using two capacitors, install them in parallel as shown in the
wiring diagram.
When the rated motor current  (1.05 to 1.1) equals to 90% or less
of the rated inverter current, the inverter capacity can be the same
as the motor kW.
*2
*3
 Reactor for sine wave filter
Model
Reactor for filter
 Capacitor for sine wave filter
Rating plate
Terminal H
G
Terminal I
G
V
X
W
Y
Display
Z C
D
U
C
*
B
A
D
E
B
A
F
E
4-H
Installation hole
F
4-G installation
hole
* Remove the eye nut after the product is installed.
Model
200V
class
400V
class
MT-BSL-75K
MT-BSL-90K
MT-BSL-H75K
MT-BSL-H110K
MT-BSL-H150K
MT-BSL-H220K
MT-BSL-H280K
MT-BSL-H75K-HC
MT-BSL-H110K-HC
MT-BSL-H150K-HC
MT-BSL-H220K-HC
MT-BSL-H280K-HC
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Mass
(kg)
330
390
330
390
455
495
575
385
420
450
510
570
150
150
150
150
200
200
200
150
170
300
350
400
285
320
285
340
397
405
470
345
400
455
540
590
185
180
185
195
200
250
310
185
195
390
430
475
216
220
216
235
240
300
370
216
235
430
485
535
328
330
318
368
380
420
485
315
370
500
555
620
M10
M12
M10
M12
M12
M12
M12
M10
M12
M12
M12
M12
M12
M12
M10
M12
M12
M12
M12
M10
M12
M12
M12
M12
80
120
80
140
190
240
340
110
180
250
310
480
Install the reactor on a horizontal surface.
77
Model
200V
class
400V
class
*
MT-BSC-75K
MT-BSC-90K
MT-BSC-H75K
MT-BSC-H110K
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
207
282
207
207
191
266
191
191
285
240
220
280
233
183
173
233
72
92
72
72
41
56
41
41
45
85
55
55
7
7
7
7
M8
M12
M6
M6
Mass
(kg)
3.9
5.5
3.0
4.0
Keep 25mm or more space between capacitors.
Recommended cable size
The cable gauge of the cables used between INV and MT-BSL as well as MTBSL and IM varies according to U, V, and W as indicated on page 78.
The following table shows the cable gauge of the BSC connecting cable.
MT-BSC-75K
MT-BSC-90K
MT-BSC-H75K
MT-BSC-H110K
38mm2
38mm2
22mm2
22mm2
*4
—
500
FR-F740P-500K
—
1200A
—
560
FR-F740P-560K
—
1500A
—
2 250
2 250
2 250
2 250
3 200
3 200
Assumes the use of a dedicated IPM motor or a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with the power supply voltage of 200VAC (200V class) / 400VAC (400V class) 50Hz.
Select the MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per inverter.
MCCB
INV
M
For using commercial-power supply operation, select a breaker with capacity which allows the motor to be directly power
supplied.
MCCB
INV
M
For installation in the United States or Canada, select a fuse in accordance with UL, cUL, the National Electrical Code and any
applicable local codes, or use UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB). (Refer to the Instruction Manual (basic))
Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor is used for emergency
stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
If using an MC for emergency stop during motor driving, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current. When using an MC on
the inverter output side for commercial-power supply operation switching using a general purpose motor, select an MC regarding the motor rated current as JEM1038-AC-3
class rated current.
Cable
For the 55K or lower, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (e.g. HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable)) with continuous maximum permissible temperature
of 75ºC. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50ºC or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 75K or higher, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (e.g. LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable)) with continuous
maximum permissible temperature of 90ºC. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50ºC or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
CAUTION
·
·
When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the inverter model, and select
cable and reactor according to the motor output.
When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the
cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power ON the breaker.
Features
Connection
example
1000A
Standard
Specifications
—
60
80
100
125
150
2 100
2 100
2 125
2 150
2 200
2 200
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
FR-F740P-450K
60
80
100
125
150
2 100
2 100
2 125
2 150
2 200
2 200
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
450
S-N150
S-N180
S-N220
S-N300
S-N300
S-N400
S-N600
S-N600
S-N600
S-N600
S-N800
1000A
Rated product
1000A
Rated product
1200A
Rated product
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Parameter
List
225A
225A
400A
400A
400A
500A
600A
600A
700A
800A
900A
Explanations
of
Parameters
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Protective
Functions
FR-F740P-90K
FR-F740P-110K
FR-F740P-132K
FR-F740P-160K
FR-F740P-185K
FR-F740P-220K
FR-F740P-250K
FR-F740P-280K
FR-F740P-315K
FR-F740P-355K
FR-F740P-400K
U, V, W
2
2
2
3.5
5.5
8
14
22
38
38
60
80
100
100
125
150
2 100
2
2
2
2
2
3.5
5.5
8
8
14
22
22
38
60
60
Options
90
110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
2
2
2
3.5
5.5
14
14
22
38
38
60
80
100
100
125
150
2 100
2
2
2
2
2
3.5
5.5
8
14
14
22
22
38
60
60
Instructions
FR-F720P-0.75K
FR-F720P-1.5K
FR-F720P-2.2K
FR-F720P-3.7K
FR-F720P-5.5K
FR-F720P-7.5K
FR-F720P-11K
FR-F720P-15K
FR-F720P-18.5K
FR-F720P-22K
FR-F720P-30K
FR-F720P-37K
FR-F720P-45K
FR-F720P-55K
FR-F720P-75K
FR-F720P-90K
FR-F720P-110K
FR-F740P-0.75K
FR-F740P-1.5K
FR-F740P-2.2K
FR-F740P-3.7K
FR-F740P-5.5K
FR-F740P-7.5K
FR-F740P-11K
FR-F740P-15K
FR-F740P-18.5K
FR-F740P-22K
FR-F740P-30K
FR-F740P-37K
FR-F740P-45K
FR-F740P-55K
FR-F740P-75K
Motor
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
Recommended Cable size *4
IPM
motor control
*3
Applicable Inverter Model
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)*2
Input Side Magnetic Contactor *3
or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELB)
(NF or NV type)
Power factor improving (AC or DC) reactor
Without
With
Without
With
10A
10A
S-N10
S-N10
15A
15A
S-N10
S-N10
20A
15A
S-N10
S-N10
30A
30A
S-N20, N21
S-N10
50A
40A
S-N25
S-N20, N21
60A
50A
S-N25
S-N25
75A
75A
S-N35
S-N35
125A
100A
S-N50
S-N50
150A
125A
S-N65
S-N50
175A
150A
S-N80
S-N65
225A
175A
S-N95
S-N80
250A
225A
S-N150
S-N125
300A
300A
S-N180
S-N150
400A
350A
S-N220
S-N180
—
400A
—
S-N300
—
400A
—
S-N300
—
500A
—
S-N400
5A
5A
S-N10
S-N10
10A
10A
S-N10
S-N10
10A
10A
S-N10
S-N10
20A
15A
S-N10
S-N10
30A
20A
S-N20, N21
S-N11, N12
30A
30A
S-N20, N21
S-N20, N21
50A
40A
S-N20, N21
S-N20, N21
60A
50A
S-N25
S-N20, N21
75A
60A
S-N25
S-N25
100A
75A
S-N35
S-N25
125A
100A
S-N50
S-N50
150A
125A
S-N65
S-N50
175A
150A
S-N80
S-N65
200A
175A
S-N80
S-N80
—
225A
—
S-N95
Compatibility
*1
*2
Motor Output
(kW) *1
Warranty
400V class
200V class
Voltage
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELB), Input Side
Magnetic Contactor, Cable size
78
Selection of rated sensitivity current of
earth leakage circuit breaker
Example
5.5mm2 × 5m
When using the earth leakage current breaker with the
inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as
follows, independently of the PWM carrier frequency:


Breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression
Rated sensitivity current:
In 10  (Ig1 + Ign + Igi + Ig2 + Igm)
Standard breaker
Rated sensitivity current:
In 10  {Ig1 + Ign + Igi + 3 Ig2 + Igm)}
Ig1, Ig2 : Leakage currents in wire path during commercial power supply
operation
Ign
: Leakage current of inverter input side noise filter
Igm
: Leakage current of motor during commercial power supply operation
Igi
: Leakage current of inverter unit
(200V 60Hz)
Leakage currents (mA)
Leakage currents (mA)
100
80
60
40
20
0
2 3.5 8 142238 80150
5.5
30 60 100
2. 0
0. 3
0. 2
0. 1
Cable size (mm )
1. 5 3. 7 7. 5 15223755
2. 2 5.5 1118. 53045
Motor capacity (kW)
(Totally-enclosed fan-cooled
type motor 400V60Hz)
80
60
40
20
0
2 3.5 8 142238 80150
5.5
30 60 100
Cable size (mm2)
leakage currents (mA)
(Three-phase three-wire delta
connection 400V60Hz)
leakage currents (mA)
Leakage current example of threephase induction motor during the
commercial power supply operation
100
Ign
Igm
(Note)1.
2.
Install the earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) on the input side
of the inverter.
In the
connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity
current is blunt against an earth (ground) fault in the inverter
output side.
Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of
national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC
section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
Breaker Designed for Harmonic
Standard Breaker
and Surge Suppression
5m
1
= 0.11
 66 
1000m
3
0 (without noise filter)
1 (without EMC filter)
Refer to the following table for the leakage current of the inverter
60m
1
= 1.32
 66 
1000m
3
Motor leakage
current Igm (mA)
Total leakage
current (mA)
Rated sensitivity
current (mA)
(Ig  10)
0.36
2.79
6.15
30
100
 Inverter leakage current (with and without EMC filter)
Input power conditions
(200V class: 220V/60Hz, 400V class: 440V/60Hz, power supply unbalance
within 3%)
2. 0
1. 0
0. 7
0. 5
Voltage
(V)
0. 3
0. 2
0. 1
Ig2
Igi
Leakage current
Ig2 (mA)
Example of leakage current per 1km during
the commercial power supply operation
when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit
120
Ig1
Leakage current
Ign (mA)
Leakage current
Igi (mA)
1. 0
0. 7
0. 5
2
3φ
M 400V
2.2kW
Inverter
Leakage current
Ig1 (mA)
(200V 60Hz)
120
Noise
filter
 Selection example (in the case of the left figure (400V class
connection))
Leakage current example of
three-phase induction motor
during the commercial
power supply operation
Example of leakage current of
cable path per 1km during the
commercial power supply operation
when the CV cable is routed in
metal conduit
ELB
5.5mm2 × 60m
Phase
grounding
1. 5 3. 7 7. 5 15223755
2. 2 5.5 1118. 53045
EMC Filter
ON (mA)
OFF (mA)
200
22 (1)*
1
400
30
1
400
1
1
Motor capacity (kW)
For " " connection, the amount of leakage current is appox.1/3 of the above value.
Earthed-neutral
system
* For the FR-F720P-0.75K and 1.5K, the EMC filter is always valid. The
leakage current is 1mA.
Noise filter by Soshin Electric Co., Ltd. (for the shipping classifications of Class NK and CCS)
The following table lists the noise filters to be used in combination with inverters. These noise filters enable compliance
with the shipping classifications of Class NK and CCS.
To purchase, contact the noise filter manufacturer. (Refer to page 78)
Inverter model
FR-F740P-
0.75K
1.5K
2.2K
3.7K
5.5K
7.5K
11K
15K
18.5K
22K
30K
37K
45K
55K
75K
Noise filter model
HF3010C-SZA
HF3010C-SZA
HF3020C-SZA
HF3020C-SZA
HF3020C-SZA
HF3020C-SZA
HF3030C-SZA
HF3040C-SZA
HF3040C-SZA
HF3060C-SZA
HF3080C-SZA
HF3100C-SZA
HF3100C-SZA
HF3150C-SZA
HF3200C-SZA
Inverter model
FR-F740P-
90K
110K
132K
160K
185K
220K
250K
280K
315K
355K
400K
450K
500K
560K
Noise filter model
HF3250C-SZA
HF3300C-SZA
HF3400C-UQ
HF3400C-UQ
HF3600C-UQ
HF3600C-UQ
HF3600C-UQ
HF3900C-UQ
HF3900C-UQ
HF3900C-UQ
HF3900C-UQ
HF31200C-UQ
HF31200C-UQ
HF31600C-UQ
Noise filter wiring example
Install a noise filter by Soshin Electric Co., Ltd. in the input side
of the inverter. For 160K or lower capacity inverter, install a line
noise filter (FR-BSF01 or FR-BLF) at the inverter's output side,
and wind it make the total pass-through time of twice (2T) or
more, as shown below.
Three-phase
AC power supply
Noise
filter
1 4
2 5
3 6
Inverter
R U
S V
T W
Line noise
filter
M
With two line noise filters
Noise
filter
Three-phase
AC power supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
Inverter
Line noise
filter
R U
S V
T W
With one line noise filter
79
M
Wiring
 Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of
the inverter will damage the inverter. Therefore, fully
check the wiring and sequence to ensure that wiring is
correct, etc. before powering on.
 The terminals P/+, P1, N/- are provided for connection
of a dedicated option. Connect only a dedicated option.
Do not short the frequency setting power supply
terminal 10 and common terminal 5 or the terminal PC
and terminal SD.
 Do not wire the maker-dedicated terminal PR/PX.
Connection
example
Standard
Specifications
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Parameter
List
Explanations
of
Parameters
Protective
Functions
Setting
 The inverter can be operated as fast as a maximum of
400Hz by parameter setting. Therefore, incorrect
setting can cause a danger. Set the upper limit using
the maximum frequency limit setting function.
 A setting higher than the initial value of DC injection
brake operation voltage or operation time can cause
motor overheat (electronic thermal relay trip).
Options
Operation
 A magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the primary
side should not be used to make frequent starts and
stops. It could cause the inverter to fail.
 However, at this time, the motor cannot be brought to a
sudden stop. Hence, provide a mechanical stopping/
holding mechanism for the machine/equipment which
requires an emergency stop.
 It will take time for the capacitor to discharge after
shutoff of the inverter power supply. When accessing
the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes
after the power supply has been switched off, and
check to make sure that there are no residual voltage
using a tester or the like.
Installation
 Avoid hostile environment where oil mist, fluff, dust
particles, etc. are suspended in the air, and install the
inverter in a clean place or put it in an ingress-protected
"enclosed" enclosure. When placing the inverter in an
enclosure, determine the cooling system and enclosure
dimensions so that the ambient temperature of the
inverter is within the permissible value. (refer to page 10
for the specified value)
 Do not install the inverter on wood or other combustible
material as it will be hot locally.
 Install the inverter in the vertical orientation.
Instructions
Safety Precautions
 To operate the inverter correctly and safely, be sure to
read the "instruction manual" before starting operation.
 This product has not been designed or manufactured
for use with any equipment or system operated under
life-threatening conditions.
 Please contact our sales office when you are
considering using this product in special applications
such as passenger mobile, medical, aerospace,
nuclear, power or undersea relay equipment or system.
 Although this product is manufactured under strict
quality control, safety devices should be installed when
a serious accident or loss is expected by a failure of
this product.
 Do not use the F700P inverter with a load other than a
three-phase induction motor or a dedicated IPM motor.
 Do not connect an IPM motor under the generalpurpose motor control settings (initial settings). Do not
use a general-purpose motor in the IPM motor control
settings. Doing so will cause a failure.
When using a dedicated IPM motor, the precautions for the
use of the dedicated IPM motor must be observed as well.
 If a surge voltage occurs in the power supply system,
this surge energy may flow into the inverter, causing
the inverter to display overvoltage protection (E.OV)
and come to an inverter trip. To prevent this, always
install an optional AC reactor (FR-HAL).
Motor
Precautions for use of the inverter
Features
Precautions for Operation/Selection
2000
1000
110165 247 330 420
Inverter capacity
550 kVA
Compatibility
Warranty
Power supply system
capacity
(kVA)
5300
5000 Capacities requiring
4000 installation of
AC reactor
3000
IPM
motor control
Power supply
 When the inverter is connected near a large-capacity
power transformer (1000kVA or more) or when a power
capacitor is to be switched over, an excessive peak
current may flow in the power input circuit, damaging
the converter circuit. To prevent this, always install the
AC reactor (FR-HAL).
80
Precautions for the use of a dedicated IPM motor
When using the dedicated IPM motor (MM-EFS, MM-EF),
the following precautions must be observed as well.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
 Do not use an IPM motor for an application where the
motor is driven by the load and runs at a speed higher
than the maximum motor speed.
Combination of Motor and Inverter
 Use the same dedicated IPM motor capacity as the
inverter capacity (except the combination of 0.75K
inverter with MM-EF-0.4kW)
 Only one IPM motor can be connected to an inverter.
 A dedicated IPM motor cannot be driven by the
commercial power supply.
 Do not use a synchronized or induction-synchronized
motor, that is not a dedicated IPM motor.
Installation
 While power is ON or for some time after power-OFF,
do not touch the motor since the motor will be
extremely hot. Touching these devices may cause a
burn.
 The outline dimensions of MM-EF motors and standard
motors are different.
(It is the same for the 55kW or lower MM-EFS and the
standard motors.)
Frame number
Output
(kW)
MM-EF
1800r/min spec.
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5, 22
30
37, 45
55
75
90
110
*
Standard
motor
IPM motor
MM-EFS
1500r/min spec.
SF-JR4P
—
71M
80M
80M
90L
100L
112M
132S
132M
160M
160L
180M
180L
200L
225S
90L
100L
112M
132S
160M
160L
180L
200L
225S
—
—
—
250SA *
250MA *
280SA *
The motor model name is SF-TH.
 The following table indicates the available installation
orientations.
Frame number
80M to 180L
Simplified diagram
Floor
installation
*1
Wall
installation
*2
Ceiling
installation
200L
225S
Terminal
direction

Shaft going
up


Shaft
horizontal




Ceiling
installation


 Standard models can be installed as they are.
*1
*2
81
connecting an IPM motor.
Applied inverter
Dedicated models are required.
Not available as installation strength is insufficient.
The floor installation condition is applicable to a slope of up to
30. If the slope is steeper, apply the wall installation condition.
To install a horizontal motor to a wall, first attach a shelf that
supports the motor legs.
Wiring Length
50m or less
50m to 100m
FR-F740P-0.75K to 1.5K
0(2kHz) to 15(14kHz)
5(2kHz) or lower
Other
0(2kHz) to 15(14kHz)
9(6kHz) or lower
Use one dedicated IPM motor for one inverter.
Multiple IPM motors cannot be connected to an
inverter.
Operation
 It takes approx. 0.1s (magnetic pole detection time) to
start a motor after a start signal is input.
 An IPM motor is a motor with embedded permanent
magnets. Regression voltage is generated when the
motor coasts at an instantaneous power failure or other
incidents. The inverter's DC bus voltage increases if
the motor coasts fast in this condition. When using the
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
function, it is recommended to also use the
regenerative avoidance operation to make startups
stable.
 The number of IPM motor poles differs by the capacity.
Thus, the relation between the rotation speed and the
frequency setting is:
Rotation speed = 120 
Speed
[r/min]

Shaft going
down


Wiring
 Applying the commercial power supply to input terminals
(U, V, W) of an IPM motor will burn the IPM motor. The
IPM motor must be connected with the output terminals
(U, V, W) of the inverter.
 An IPM motor is a motor with interior permanent
magnets. High voltage is generated at motor terminals
while the motor is running. Before wiring or inspection,
the motor must be confirmed to be stopped.
In an application, such as fan and blower, where the
motor is driven by the load, a low-voltage manual
contactor must be connected at the inverter's output
side, and wiring and inspection must be performed
while the contactor is open. Otherwise you may get an
electric shock. The inverter power must be turned ON
before closing the contacts of the contactor at the
output side.
 Match the input terminals (U, V, W) of the motor and
the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter when
connecting.
 Use the following length of wiring or shorter when
300
600
900
1200
1500
1800
2250
2400
2700
*1
*2
0.4kW to
30kW
15
30
45
60
75
90
112.5
120
135
frequency setting value
number of motor poles
Frequency setting value [Hz]
MM-EF
MM-EFS
37kW to
90kW,
0.75kW to 18.5kW to
75kW
110kW
15kW
55kW
20
40
60
80
100
120
150
160
180
20
40
60
80
100
120
150
160
15
30
45
60
75
90
112.5
20
40
60
80
100
120
150
—*2
—*2
—*1
—*2
—*2
The maximum speed of MM-EF90kW and 110kW is 2400r/min.
The maximum speed of MM-EFS is 2250r/min.
Connection with machine
Connected by belt
 When installing, place the motor shaft and the machine
shaft in parallel, and mount them to a position where
their pulley centers are aligned. Their pulley centers
should also have a right angle to each shaft.
 An excessively stretched belt may damage the bearing
and break the shafts. A loose belt may slip off and
easily deteriorate. A flat belt should be rotated lightly
when it is pulled by one hand.
For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the motor.
Connected by gear couplings
 Place the motor and machine shafts in parallel, and
engage the gear teeth properly.
Permissible vibration of the motor
Power transfer mechanism
100
500 1000 1500 20002250
Rotation speed [r/min]
Permissible load of the shaft
MM-EFS1M(4)
L [mm] *1
Permissible radial load [N]
*2
Permissible thrust load [N]
*2
MM-EFS1M(4)
L [mm] *1
Permissible radial load [N]
*2
Permissible thrust load [N]
*2
*1
*2
7
15
40
50
22
535
585
830
470
500
15K
18K
37
55
60
75
11K
80
110
1070
1710
2150
695
900
1420
1810
22K
30K
37K
110
45K
55K
140
2150
2940
3230
4900
5880
1810
2350
2740
2940
2740
For the symbols used in the table,
refer to the diagram at right.
The permissible radial load and the
permissible thrust load are the
permissible values when they are
applied individually.
L
Radial load
Thrust load
Instructions for overload operation
 When performing operation of frequent start/stop of the
inverter, rise/fall in the temperature of the transistor
element of the inverter will repeat due to a continuous
flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal
fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is related to the amount
of current, the life can be increased by reducing bound
current, starting current, etc. Since thermal fatigue is
related to the amount of current, the life can be
increased by reducing current. However, decreasing
current will result in insufficient toque and the inverter
may not start. A counter action for this to raise the
permissible current level by increasing the inverter
capacity when using a general-purpose motor, and by
increasing the inverter and IPM capacities when using
an IPM motor.
Connection
example
Standard
Specifications
Instructions
60
50
40
30
[ m] 20
 When an oil-lubricated gear box, speed change gear or
similar device is used in the power transfer system,
note that continuous operation at low decelerated
speed only may deteriorate oil lubrication, causing
seizure. When performing fast operation at higher than
60Hz, fully note that such operation will cause strength
shortage due to the noise, life or centrifugal force of the
power transfer mechanism.
Options
(gear, belt, chain, etc.)
80
Motor
Vibration amplitude
(double amplitude)
200
IPM
motor control
 Bearing is subjected to fretting
while the motor is stopped.
Suppress the vibration to
about the half of the
permissible value.
Amplitude at each vibration
condition is as shown right.
Acceleration and deceleration times
 The acceleration/deceleration time of the motor depends
on the motor-generated torque, load torque and moment
of inertia of the load (GD2).
 When the current limit function or stall prevention function is
activated during acceleration/deceleration, increase the
acceleration/deceleration time as the actual time may
become longer.
 To decrease the acceleration/deceleration time,
increase the torque boost value (setting of a too large
value may activate the stall prevention function at a
start, longer the acceleration time), use the simple
magnetic flux vector control, or increase the inverter
and motor capacities. To decrease the deceleration
time, it is necessary to add the brake unit (FR-BU2,
MT-BU5), power regeneration common converter (FRCV), power regeneration unit (MT-RC) or a similar
device to absorb braking energy.
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
CAUTION
When a fan or blower is directly connected to the motor shaft or to the
machine, the machine side may become unbalanced. When the
unbalanced degree becomes larger, the motor vibration becomes larger
and may result in a damage of the bearing or other area. The balance
quality with the machine should meet the class G2.5 or lower of JISB0905
(the Balance Quality Requirements of Rigid Rotors).
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
Use a feeler gauge to check the gaps in a few places, and make
sure that all the gap sizes are the same (3/100mm or less difference
except the gap A).
Unevenness shown in B is unacceptable (3/100mm or smaller
difference)
 The start and acceleration characteristics of the motor
driven by the inverter are restricted by the overload
current rating of that inverter. Generally the torque
characteristic is less than when the motor is started by
a commercial power supply. When torque boost
adjustment or simple magnetic flux vector cannot
provide enough starting torque, select the inverter of
one rank higher capacity or increase the capacities of
both the motor and inverter.
Compatibility
*2
Bad
Warranty
*1
Bad
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Starting torque of the motor
A *1
Good
Parameter
List
* Multiple IPM motors cannot be connected to an inverter.
Explanations
of
Parameters
Level meter
B
*2
Level meter
Inverter capacity selection
 When operating a special motor or more than one motor in
parallel with a single inverter, select the inverter capacity so
that 1.1 times the total rated motor current is less than the
rated output current of the inverter.
Protective
Functions
 When installing, align the motor shaft center and the
machine shaft. Insert a liner underneath the motor or the
machine legs as required to make a perfect alignment.
Features
Precautions for selection
Direct connection
82
Precautions for Peripheral Device Selection
Installation and selection of moulded case
circuit breaker
Install a moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power
receiving side to protect the wiring of the inverter primary
side. For MCCB selection, refer to page 78 since it depends
on the inverter power supply side power factor (which
changes depending on the power supply voltage, output
frequency and load). Note that the operation characteristics
of the completely electromagnetic MCCB changes
according to the higher harmonic current, so a larger
capacity must be selected. (Check it in the data of the
corresponding breaker.) As an earth (ground) leakage
breaker, use the Mitsubishi earth (ground) leakage breaker
designed for harmonics and surges. (Refer to page 79.)
When installing a moulded case circuit breaker on the
secondary side of the inverter, contact each manufacturer
for selection of the moulded case circuit breaker.
Handling of primary side magnetic contactor
For operation via external terminal (terminal STF or STR
used), provide a primary side MC to prevent an accident
caused by a natural restart at power recovery after a power
failure, such as an instantaneous power failure, and to
ensure safety for maintenance work. Do not use this
magnetic contactor to make frequent starts and stops. (The
switching life of the inverter input circuit is about 1,000,000
times.) For parameter unit operation, an automatic restart
after power failure is not made and the MC cannot be used
to make a start. Note that the primary side MC can stop the
operation, but the regenerative brake specific to the inverter
does not operate and the motor coasts to stop.
Handling of secondary side magnetic contactor
Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and
motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a
stop. When the magnetic contactor is turned on while the
inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter
and such will activate. When an MC is provided to switch
to a commercial power supply, for example, it is
recommended to use commercial power supply-inverter
switchover operation Pr. 135 to Pr. 139.
* An IPM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.
Thermal relay installation
The inverter has an electronic thermal relay function to
protect the motor from overheating. However, when running
multiple motors with one inverter or operating a multi-pole
motor, provide a thermal relay (OCR) between the inverter
and motor. In this case, set the electronic thermal relay
function of the inverter to 0A. And for the setting of the
thermal relay, add the line-to-line leakage current (refer to
page 84) to the current value on the motor rating plate.
For low-speed operation where the cooling capability of
the motor reduces, it is recommended to use a thermal
protector or thermistor-incorporated motor.
* Multiple IPM motors cannot be connected to an inverter.
Secondary side measuring instrument
When the wiring length between the inverter and motor is
long, select the device that has enough current rating.
Otherwise the measuring instrument or CT which is used
especially for the 400V class small-capacity inverter may
generate heat due to the influence of line leakage current.
To measure and display the output voltage and output
current of the inverter, it is recommended to use the
terminal AM-5 output function of the inverter.
Disuse of power factor improving capacitor
(power capacitor)
The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor
on the inverter output side may be overheated or damaged by
the harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since
an excessive current flows in the inverter to activate
overcurrent protection, do not install a capacitor or surge
suppressor. For power factor improvement, use the power
factor improving DC reactor (see page 70).
Wire thickness and wiring distance
When the wiring length between the inverter and motor is
long, use thick wires so that the voltage drop of the main
circuit cable is 2% or less especially at low frequency
output. (A selection example for the wiring distance of
20m is shown on page 78)
Especially at a long wiring distance, the maximum wiring
length should be within 500m since the overcurrent
protection function may be misactivated by the influence of a
charging current due to the stray capacitances of the wiring.
The overall wiring length for connection of multiple motors
should be within the value in the table below. (Refer to page
81 for IPM motors.)
Pr. 72 PWM frequency
selection setting
(carrier frequency)
0.75K
1.5K
2.2K or higher
2
3 to 15
300m
200m
500m
300m
500m
500m
Use the recommended connection cable when installing
the operation panel away from the inverter unit or when
connecting the parameter unit.
For remote operation via analog signal, wire the control
cable between the operation box or operation signal and
inverter within 30m and away from the power circuits
(main circuit and relay sequence circuit) to prevent
induction from other devices.
When using the external potentiometer instead of the
parameter unit to set the frequency, use a shielded or
twisted cable, and do not earth (ground) the shield, but
connect it to terminal 5 as shown below.
(3)
10 (10E)
(2)
2
(1)
Frequency setting
potentiometer
(3)
Twisted cable
5
Shielded cable
10 (10E)
(2)
2
(1)
5
Frequency setting
potentiometer
83
Power
supply for
sensor
Influence
and
measures
Do not earth (ground) shield but
connect it to signal common cable.
Do not earth (ground) control cable.
This leakage current flows via a static capacitance between
the inverter output cables.
 The external thermal relay may be operated unnecessarily
by the harmonics of the leakage current.When the wiring
length is long (50m or more) for the 400V class smallcapacity model (7.5kW or less), the external thermal relay is
likely to operate unnecessarily because the ratio of the
leakage current to the rated motor current increases.
 Countermeasures
 Use Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay.
 If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr. 72
PWM frequency selection setting.
Note that motor noise increases. Select Pr. 240 Soft-PWM
operation selection to make the sound inoffensive.
To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line
leakage currents, it is recommended to use a temperature
sensor to directly detect motor temperature.
MCCB
Undesirable
current path
Power
supply
MC
Thermal relay
Inverter
Motor
Connection
example
Standard
Specifications
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
Protective
Functions
Influence and Measures

Explanations
of
Parameters
Parameter
List
Motor
C
Line leakage current
Type
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
C
NV2
Leakage
breaker
M Motor
Use a twisted pair shielded cable
Sensor
Motor
C
Leakage
breaker
Undesirable
current path
Use 4-core cable for motor
power cable and use one cable
as earth (ground) cable.
Separate inverter and
power line by more than
30cm (at least 10cm)
from sensor circuit.
Control
power
supply
Do not earth (ground)
enclosure directly.
FRBLF
Inverter
NV1
Power
supply
Options
Inverter
Influence
and
measures
Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's own
line but also into the other lines through the earth (ground)
cable, etc.These leakage currents may operate earth
(ground) leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays
unnecessarily.
 Countermeasures
 If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr. 72
PWM frequency selection setting.
Note that motor noise increases. Select Pr. 240 Soft-PWM
operation selection to make the sound inoffensive.
 By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for
harmonic and surge suppression in the inverter's own line
and other line, operation can be performed with the carrier
frequency kept high (with low noise).
Instructions
EMC
filter
Influence and Measures

M
Line-to-line static
capacitances
Line-to-line leakage currents path
Motor
Inverter
power
supply
Decrease carrier frequency
Type
IPM
motor control
Enclosure
Install filter (FR-BLF,
FR-BSF01) on
inverter output side.
To-earth (ground) leakage currents
Compatibility
Noise
When performing low-noise operation at higher carrier
frequency, electromagnetic noise tends to increase.
Therefore, refer to the following measure example and
consider taking the measures. Depending on the
installation condition, the inverter may be affected by
noise in a non-low noise (initial) status.
 The noise level can be reduced by decreasing the
carrier frequency (Pr. 72).
 As measures against AM radio broadcasting noise and
sensor malfunction, turning on the built-in EMC filter
produces an effect. (For the switching method, refer to
the instruction manual.)
 As measures against induction noise from the power
cable of the inverter, an effect is produced by putting a
distance of 30cm (at least 10cm) or more and using a
twisted pair shielded cable as a signal cable. Do not
earth (ground) shield but connect it to signal common
cable.
Noise reduction examples
Features
Leakage currents
Capacitances exist between the inverter I/O cables, other
cables and earth and in the motor, through which a
leakage current flows. Since its value depends on the
capacitances, carrier frequency, etc., low acoustic noise
operation at the increased carrier frequency of the
inverter will increase the leakage current. Therefore, take
the following measures. Select the earth leakage breaker
according to its rated sensitivity current, independently of
the carrier frequency setting.
Warranty
Earth (Ground)
When the inverter is run in the low acoustic noise mode,
more leakage currents occur than in the non-low acoustic
noise mode due to high-speed switching operation. Be
sure to use the inverter and motor after grounding
(earthing) them. In addition, always use the earth
(ground) terminal of the inverter to earth (ground) the
inverter. (Do not use the case and chassis)
84
 Harmonic suppression guideline
Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power
receiving point via a power transformer. The harmonic
suppression guidelines were established to protect other
consumers from these outgoing harmonic currents.
The three-phase 200V input specifications 3.7kW or less
are previously covered by "Harmonic suppression
guideline for household appliances and general-purpose
products" and other models are covered by "Harmonic
suppression guideline for consumers who receive high
voltage or special high voltage". However, the generalpurpose inverter has been excluded from the target
products covered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for
household appliances and general-purpose products" in
January 2004 and all capacities of all models are now
target products of "Harmonic suppression guideline for
consumers who receive high voltage or special high
voltage".
 Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who
receive high voltage or special high voltage
This guideline sets forth the maximum values of
harmonic currents outgoing from a high-voltage or
especially high-voltage consumer who will install,
add or renew harmonic generating equipment. If any
of the maximum values is exceeded, this guideline
requires that consumer to take certain suppression
measures.
Users who use models other than the target models are
not covered by the guideline. However, we ask to connect
an AC reactor and a DC reactor as before.
For compliance to the "Harmonic suppression guideline
for consumers who receive high voltage or special high
voltage"
Input
Power
Supply
Target
Capacity
Make a judgment based on "Harmonic
suppression guideline for consumers who receive
high voltage or special high voltage" issued by the
Japanese Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry
(formerly Ministry of International Trade and
Industry) in September 1994 and take measures if
necessary. For calculation method of power supply
harmonics, refer to materials below.
Threephase 200V
All
capacities
Threephase 400V
85
Measures
Reference materials
 "Harmonic suppression measures of the
general-purpose inverter"
Jan., 2004 Japan Electrical Manufacturer's
Association
 "Calculation method of harmonic current of the
general-purpose inverter used by specific
consumers"
JEM-TR201 (Revised in December 2003) :
Japan Electrical Manufacturer's Association
For compliance to "Harmonic suppression guideline of
the general-purpose inverter (input current of 20A or less)
for consumers other than specific consumers" published
by JEMA
Input
Power
Supply
Target
Capacity
Measures
Connect the AC reactor or DC reactor
recommended in a catalog or an instruction manual.
Threephase 200V
3.7kW
or less
Reference materials
 "Harmonic suppression guideline of the generalpurpose inverter (input current of 20A or less)"
JEM-TR226 (Revised in December 2003) :
Japan Electrical Manufacturer's Association
 Calculation of outgoing harmonic current
Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted from
received power voltage)  operation ratio  harmonic content
 Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor  operation time ratio
during 30 minutes
 Harmonic content: Found in Table.
Table 1: Harmonic content (Values of the fundamental current is 100%)
5th
7th
11th
13th
17th
19th
23rd
25th
Not used
Reactor
65
41
8.5
7.7
4.3
3.1
2.6
1.8
Used (AC side)
38
14.5
7.4
3.4
3.2
1.9
1.7
1.3
Used (DC side)
30
13
8.4
5.0
4.7
3.2
3.0
2.2
Used (AC, DC sides)
28
9.1
7.2
4.1
3.2
2.4
1.6
1.4
Table 2: Rated capacities and outgoing harmonic currents of inverter-driven motors
Fundamental
Fundamental Wave Current Converted from
Rated
Applied
WaveCurrent Rated
6.6kV
Current [A]
Converted Capacity
(No reactor, 100% operation ratio)
Motor
kW
from 6.6kV
(kVA)
200V 400V
5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
(mA)
0.75 2.74 1.37
83
0.97 53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494
1.5
5.50 2.75
167
1.95 108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006
2.2
7.93 3.96
240
2.81 156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320
3.7
13.0 6.50
394
4.61 256.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092
5.5
19.1 9.55
579
6.77 376.4 237.4 49.22 44.58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42
7.5
25.6 12.8
776
9.07 504.4 318.2 65.96 59.75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97
11
36.9 18.5
1121
13.1 728.7 459.6 95.29 86.32 48.20 34.75 29.15 20.18
15
49.8 24.9
1509
17.6 980.9 618.7 128.3 116.2 64.89 46.78 39.24 27.16
18.5 61.4 30.7
1860
21.8 1209 762.6 158.1 143.2 79.98 57.66 48.36 33.48
22
73.1 36.6
2220
25.9 1443 910.2 188.7 170.9 95.46 68.82 57.72 39.96
30
98.0 49.0
2970
34.7 1931 1218 252.5 228.7 127.7 92.07 77.22 53.46
37
121 60.4
3660
42.8 2379 1501 311.1 281.8 157.4 113.5 95.16 65.88
45
147 73.5
4450
52.1 2893 1825 378.3 342.7 191.4 138.0 115.7 80.10
55
180 89.9
5450
63.7 3543 2235 463.3 419.7 234.4 169.0 141.7 98.10
Fundamental
Fundamental Wave Current Converted from
Rated
Applied
WaveCurrent Rated
6.6kV
Current [A]
Motor
Converted Capacity
(With DC reactor , 100% operation ratio)
kW
from 6.6kV
(kVA)
200V 400V
5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
(mA)
75
245 123
7455
87.2 2237 969 626 373 350 239 224 164
90
293 147
8909
104 2673 1158 748 445 419 285 267 196
110
357 179
10848
127 3254 1410 911 542 510 347 325 239
132
— 216
13091
153 3927 1702 1100 655 615 419 393 288
160
— 258
15636
183 4691 2033 1313 782 735 500 469 344
220
— 355
21515
252 6455 2797 1807 1076 1011 688 645 473
250
— 403
24424
286 7327 3175 2052 1221 1148 782 733 537
280
— 450
27273
319 8182 3545 2291 1364 1282 873 818 600
315
— 506
30667
359 9200 3987 2576 1533 1441 981 920 675
355
— 571
34606
405 10382 4499 2907 1730 1627 1107 1038 761
400
— 643
38970
456 11691 5066 3274 1949 1832 1247 1169 857
450
— 723
43818
512 13146 5696 3681 2191 2060 1402 1315 964
500
— 804
48727
570 14618 6335 4093 2436 2290 1559 1462 1072
560
— 900
54545
638 16364 7091 4582 2727 2564 1746 1636 1200
Application to Motor
Output characteristics
60
45
38
25
Continuous operation
torque
20
10
20
30
60
Output frequency (Hz) 120
75
65
45
38
25
Connection
example
*1
Short time maximum torque
104
95
80
67
53
Continuous operation
torque
25
9
0 13 6
20
30
50
Output frequency (Hz)
120
Torque boost minimum (0%)
Torque boost standard (initial value)
Torque boost large (0.75K... 10%, 1.5K to 3.7K... 7%, 5.5K, 7.5K... 6%, 11K or higher... 4%)
Enabled for torque boost adjustment (3.7kW or lower) or simple magnetic flux vector control (slip compensation setting)
 The 60Hz torque reference indicates that the rated torque of the motor running at 60Hz is 100%, and the 50Hz torque reference
indicates that the rated torque of the motor running at 50Hz is 100%
 A general-purpose, squirrel-cage motor must be used at lower continuous operating torque in rated operation as shown in the
chart since the cooling capability of the fan installed on the rotor reduces at a lower speed. (Instantaneous torque occurs)
 200/220V 60Hz or 200V 50Hz in the chart indicates a motor torque standard (base frequency set in Pr.3 of the inverter) and is
not the frequency of the power supply.
You can also set 60Hz in a 50Hz power supply area.
 As shown in the chart, the 60Hz torque reference setting allows you to use the motor more efficiently as it can bring out the
100% torque of the motor continuously.
 To operate continuously with the 50Hz torque reference, reduce the load torque to 85% or less.
 This chart shows the characteristic available when a constant-torque load is selected for load pattern selection (Pr. 14).
Motor loss and temperature rise
The motor operated by the inverter has a limit on the
continuous operating torque since it is slightly higher in
temperature rise than the one operated by a commercial
power supply. At a low speed, reduce the output torque of
the motor since the cooling effect decreases. When
100% torque is needed continuously at low speed,
consider using a constant-torque motor.
Torque characteristic
The motor operated by the inverter may be less in motor
torque (especially starting torque) than the one driven by
the commercial power supply. It is necessary to fully
check the load torque characteristic of the machine.
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
120
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
*2
Output frequency (Hz)
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
85
*3
50
Vibration
The machine-installed motor operated by the inverter
may be slightly greater in vibration than the one driven by
the commercial power supply. The possible causes of
vibration are as follows.
1.Vibration due to imbalance of the rotator itself including
the machine
2.Resonance due to the natural oscillation of the
mechanical system. Caution is required especially
when the machine used at constant speed is operated
at variable speed. The frequency jump function allows
resonance points to be avoided during operation.
(During acceleration/deceleration, the frequency within
the setting range is passed through.) An effect is also
produced if the PWM carrier frequency in Pr. 72 is
changed. When a two-pole motor is operated at higher
than 60Hz, caution should be taken since such
operation may cause abnormal vibration.
Parameter
List
200V
80
70
63
*4
30
Explanations
of
Parameters
Short time maximum torque
220V
20
Protective
Functions
*1
3 6
Options
*2
120
110
100
0
Output frequency (Hz) 120
Instructions
*3
60
Continuous operation torque
Motor
*4
30
Short time maximum torque (%)
50
45
30
20
Continuous output torque (%)
100
90
80
Short time maximum torque (%)
3 6
Standard
Specifications
65
IPM
motor control
Continuous operation torque
75
Compatibility
50
45
30
Short time maximum torque
104
85
Warranty
output torque (%)
output torque (%)
200V
90
80
70
63
0 13 6
*1
*2
*3
*4
220V
Short time maximum torque
120
100
50Hz torque reference
0
Continuous output torque (%)
V/F control
Simple magnetic flux vector control
60Hz torque reference
Features
Application to standard motor
When the Mitsubishi standard squirrel-cage motor (SF-JR, 4-pole) and inverter of the same capacity are used, the torque
characteristics are as shown below.
86
Inverter-driven 400V class motor
Application to constant-torque motor
When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, surge
voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the
motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor. In
such a case, consider taking the following measures.
Since a constant-torque motor is greater in current than the
standard motor, the inverter capacity may be one rank higher.
For a constant-torque motor, decrease the torque boost
setting.
Recommended value 0.75kW... 6%, 1.5 to 3.7kW... 4%,
5.5 to 7.5kW...3%, 11 to 37kW...2%,
45 to 55kW...1.5%, 75k or higher...1%
When two or more motors are operated synchronously, torque
imbalance is likely to occur as motor slip is smaller than that of
the standard motor.
(Under general-purpose motor control)
It is recommended to take either of the following
measures.
(1) Rectifying the motor insulation and limiting the PWM
carrier frequency according to the wiring length
For the 400V class motor, use an insulation-enhanced
motor.
Specifically,
1)Specify the "400V class inverter-driven insulationenhanced motor". (Mitsubishi standard motors (SFJR, SB-JR 4-pole) are the 400V class inverter-driven
reinforced insulation models.)
2)For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque
motor and low-vibration motor, use the "inverterdriven, dedicated motor".
3) Set Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection as indicated below
according to the wiring length
Wiring Length
Pr. 72 PWM
frequency selection
50m or less
50m to
100m
exceeding
100m
15(14.5kHz)
or less
9(9kHz) or
less
9(9kHz) or
less
(2) Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side
Connect the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASFH/FR-BMF-H) to the 55K or lower and the sine wave
filter (MT-BSL/BSC) to the 75K or higher on the inverter
output side.
(Under IPM motor control)
Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection according to the wiring
length as shown below.
Applied inverter
FR-F740P-0.75K,
1.5K
Other
Wiring Length
50m or less
50m to 100m
0(2kHz) to 15(14kHz)
5(2kHz) or less
0(2kHz) to 15(14kHz)
9(6kHz) or less
CAUTION
· The surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMFH) option and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) cannot be
used under IPM motor control, so do not connect them.
87
Application to special motors
Pole changing motor
As this motor differs in rated current from the standard
motor, confirm the maximum current of the motor and
select the inverter. Be sure to change the number of
poles after the motor has stopped. If the number of poles
is changed during rotation, the regenerative overvoltage
protection circuit may be activated to cause an inverter
alarm, coasting the motor to a stop.
Geared motor
The continuous operating rotation range of this motor
changes depending on the lubrication system and maker.
Especially in the case of oil lubrication, continuous
operation in the low speed range only can cause gear
seizure. For fast operation at higher than 60Hz, please
consult the maker.
Synchronous motor
dedicated IPM motor
other
than
a
This motor is not suitable for applications of large load
variation or impact, where out-of-sync is likely to occur.
Please contact us when using this motor because its
starting current and rated current are greater than those
of the standard motor and will not rotate stably at low
speed.
Application to premium high-efficiency IPM motor [MM-EFS (1500r/min) series]
22
37
55
75
11K
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
Continuous Rated output (kW) 0.75 1.5
characteristic
Rated torque (Nm) 4.77 9.55
**1
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
14
23.6
35
47.7
70
95.5
118
140
191
236
286
350
20
40
55
110 275 280
760 770 1700 1700 1900 3400 3850 6500
Moment of inertia
200V
class
3
6.0
8.2
13.4
20
27
40
54
66
79
110 128 157 194
Rated
current (A)
1.5
3.0
4.1
6.7
10
13.5
20
27
33 39.5 55
64 78.5 97
400V class
Totally-enclosed fan-cooled motor. With steel framed legs. (protective structure IP44 **2)
Structure
F class
Insulation class
V-15
Vibration class
Surrounding air
-10°C to +40°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
temperature and
humidity
Storage temperature
-20°C to +70°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Environment
and humidity
Indoors (not under direct sunlight), and free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt.
Atmosphere
Maximum 1,000m above sea level
Altitude
Vibration
4.9m/s2
11
15
22
31
50
53
95
100
135
155 215 230 285
Mass(kg)
*1
*2
The above characteristics apply when the rated AC voltage is input from the inverter. (Refer to page 8.)
Output and rated motor speed are not guaranteed when the power supply voltage drops.
This excludes the part where the axis passes through.
Motor torque characteristic
The following figure shows the torque characteristic of the premium high-efficiency IPM motor [MM-EFS (1500r/min)
series] when used with an inverter.
140
Short time (60s) maximum torque
Torque[%]
120
83.3%
(100% reference torque at 1800r/min rating)
100
80
60
Continuous operation
torque
40
80%
66.7%
20
0
0
150
300 500
900 1200 1500 1800
2100
2250
Speed [r/min]
REMARKS
· The motor can also be used for applications which require the rated speed of 1800r/min.
CAUTION
 The torque characteristic is when the armature winding temperature is 20°C, and the input voltage to the inverter is 200VAC or
400VAC.
 Constant-speed operation cannot be performed for the speed of 150r/min or less.
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
225S
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
200L
Parameter
List
180L
Explanations
of
Parameters
180M
Protective
Functions
90L
(10-4kgm2)
Options
80M
8
120% 60s
100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L
Instructions
6
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
1500
2250
Motor
Rated speed (r/min)
Maximum speed (r/min)
Number of poles
Maximum torque
Frame number
IPM
motor control
Compatible
inverter
15K 18K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K
Connection
example
15
Standard
Specifications
7
Compatibility
200V class
MM-EFS1M
400V class
MM-EFS1M4
200V class
FR-F720P-K
400V class
FR-F740P-K
Warranty
Motor
model
Features
Motor specification
88
Outline drawing of motors
(1) 30K or lower
R
A
KL
B
Q
QK
KA
D
W
XB
Sliding distance
X
U
F
T
F
E
E
M
Z
N
KD
0
KG
C
C -0.5
H
C
S
Section CC
Output Frame
(kW) number
Model
7
15
22
200V class
37
MM-EFS1M 55
75
11K
400V class
MM-EFS1M4 15K
18K
22K
30K
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
80M
90L
100L
112M
132S
132M
160M
160L
122
143
173
181
211.5
230.5
252
274
95
110.5
128
135
152
171
198
220
80
90
100
112
132
132
160
160
161.6
183.6
207
228
266
266
318
318
62.5
70
80
95
108
108
127
127
180M
292.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 359
180L
311.5 242.5 180 363 139.5 139.5 359
A
B
Frame leg viewed from underneath
Outline Dimension (mm)
KA KD KG KL M N XB
S
T
U
W
X
32 140
40 168.5
45 193
45 200
63 239
63 258
90 323
90 345
19j6
24j6
28j6
28j6
38k6
38k6
42k6
42k6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
3.5
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
8
8
8
10
10
12
12
15 9
15 9
4 12
4 12
4 12
4 12
4 14.5
4 14.5
127
56 168 289 335 285 121 110 90 351.5
48k6
9
5.5 14
146
56 168 289 335 323 121 110 90 370.5 55m6
10
50 164 39.5
62.5 182 53
70 203.5 65
70
226
69
70 265 75
89 265 94
105 316 105
127 316 127
27
27
27
27
27
27
56
56
63
76
88
103
120
120
142
142
145
158
169
180
197
197
266
266
160
175
200
230
256
256
310
310
Q QK
125 50 40
150 56 50
180 63 60
180 70 60
180 89 80
218 89 80
254 108 110
298 108 110
R
6
16
4
14.5
4
14.5
(2) 37K to 55K
R
140
110
D
φ90
KA
H
KG
KP
M16 screw
C
0
C -0.5
C
9
W
Sliding distance
S
Section CC
Output Frame
(kW) number A
Model
200V class
MM-EFS1M
B
C
D
E
F
18.5
XB
N
U
F
T
F
1
30
70
E
E
M
Frame leg viewed from underneath
Outline Dimension (mm)
H KA KG KP M N
XB
R
S
T U W
37K
45K
37
45
200L
355 267.5 200 406 159 152.5 401 145 472 548 390 361 133 425.5 60m6 11 7 18
400V class
55K
MM-EFS1M4
55
225S
365
277
225 446 178
143
446 145 517 593 428 342 149
432
65m6 11 7 18
CAUTION
· The outline dimensions are the dimensions of typical motors. The outer appearance may differ according the frame number.
89
Z
Features
Application to high-efficiency IPM motor [MM-EF (1800r/min) series]
Motor specification
75
90K 110K
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
3.7
7.5
5.5
19.6
7.5
Maximum speed (r/min)
2700 (135Hz)
Number of poles
Maximum torque
Frame number
6
3.0
1.5
5.9
3.0
22
30
37
37
45
55
45
—
—
90
110
90
110
75
55
75
51.2
1800 (120Hz)
2700 (180Hz)
2400
(160Hz)
120% 60s
132S
160M
112M
125 153 274 354
160L
815
180L
200L
225S
1050 2215 2400 4300 5200 8700 9500
8.7 14.4 22 29 43 55 70.5 83.5 109 136 162 195 272 —
—
4.4 7.2 11 14.5 21.5 27.5 35 42 57 68 81 96.5 136 160 197
Totally-enclosed fan-cooled motor (protective structure IP44 *2)
B class
F class
-10°C to +40°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
-20°C to +70°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Indoors (not under direct sunlight), and free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt.
Maximum 1,000m above sea level
8.5
9.0
11
15
23
33
38
4.9m/s2(0.5G)
52 60 105 105 119 167 178 240 290 360 390
Options
The above characteristics apply when the rated AC voltage is input from the inverter. (Refer to page 8.)
Output and rated motor speed are not guaranteed when the power supply voltage drops.
This excludes the part where the axis passes through.
Motor torque characteristic
The following figures show the torque characteristics of high-efficiency IPM motors [MM-EF (1800r/min) series] when used
with inverters.
75K or lower
90K or higher
80
60
Continuous operation
torque
40
Short time(60s) maximum
torque
100
80%
66.7%
Torque[%]
Torque[%]
Short time(60s) maximum
torque
100
80
60
90%
75%
Continuous operation
torque
40
20
20
0
0
180
0
300
600
900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700
Speed [r/min]
0
180
300 600
IPM
motor control
120
120
Motor
140
140
900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400
Speed[r/min]
CAUTION
 The torque characteristic is when the armature winding temperature is 20°C, and the input voltage to the inverter is 200VAC or
400VAC.
 Constant-speed operation cannot be performed for the speed of 180r/min or less.
Compatibility
*2
18.5
30
8
Vibration
Mass(kg)
15
22
Warranty
Environment
Atmosphere
Altitude
90L 100L
10.4 10.4 18.4 36.9
18.5
29.2 39.8 58.4 79.6 98.1 117 159 196 239 292 398 477 584
1800 (90Hz)
80M
15
11
Rated speed (r/min)
200V class
1.6
Rated
current (A)
400V class
0.8
Structure
Insulation class
Surrounding air
temperature and
humidity
Storage
temperature and
humidity
*1
11
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
0.75 0.75
Continuous Rated output (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
characteristic
Rated torque (Nm) 2.12 3.98 7.96 11.7
*1
Moment of inertia (10-4kgm2)
—
11K 15K 18K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K
Connection
example
55
Standard
Specifications
37
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
22
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
15
Parameter
List
200V class
FR-F720P-K
400V class
FR-F740P-K
7
Explanations
of
Parameters
Compatible
inverter
—
4
Protective
Functions
200V class
MM-EF2
400V class
MM-EF24
Instructions
Motor
model
90
Outline drawing of motors
(1) 45K or lower
KL
A
R
KA
D
B
Q
QK
H
A
0
C -0.5
A
Sliding distance
X
F
Z
T
U
W
F
200V class
MM-EF2
Outline Dimension (mm)
Output Frame
(kW) number
4
7
A
0.4
0.75
E
M
Frame leg viewed
from underneath
Section A-A
Model
E
S
N
B
C
D
E
F
H
KA
95
80
161.6
62.5
50
164
KL
M
N
95
80M
122
39.5 145 160 125
Q
QK
R
S
T
U
W
X
Z
30
25
135
14j6
40
32
145
19j6
5
3
5
15
9
6
3.5
6
15
9
Moment of
inertia J
(kgm2)
0.00104
15
22
1.5
50
40
155
24j6
7
4
8
15
9
0.00184
2.2
90L
143
110.5
90
183.6
70
62.5
186.3
53
158 175 150
60
45
180.5
28j6
7
4
8
4
9
0.00369
37
55
3.7
100L
173
128
100
207
80
70
203.5
65
169 200 180
60
45
198
28j6
7
4
8
4
12
0.00512
75
11K
7.5
112M
181
135
112
228
95
70
226
69
185 230 180
80
63
225
38k6
8
5
10
4
12
132S
211.5
152
132
266
108
70
265
75
237 256 180 110
90
272
42k6
8
5
12
4
12
160M
252
198
160
318
127
105
316
105 266 310 254 110
90
326
48k6
9
5.5
14
4
14.5
160L
274
220
160
318
127
127
316
127 266 310 298 110
90
348
55m6 10
6
16
4
14.5
400V class
15K
MM-EF24
18K
5.5
11
15
18.5
22K
30K
22
37K
45K
37
30
45
180L
311.5 244.5 180
363
139.5 139.5
359
146 351 335 323 140 110 402.5 60m6 11
7
18
4
0.0125
0.0153
0.0274
0.0354
0.0815
0.105
0.2215
14.5
0.24
(2) 55K or higher
R
A
B
D
Q
QK
KG
M16 screw
H
A
KP
φ90
KA
11 0
C -0.5
A
9
30
70
XB
N
U
T
W
S
Section A-A
Output Frame
(kW) number
Model
200V class
MM-EF2
E
Sliding distance
X
E
M
Z
F
F
Frame leg viewed
from underneath
Outline Dimension (mm)
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
KA KG KP
M
N
XB
Q
QK
R
S
T
U
W X
7
18
Z
Moment of
inertia J
(kgm2)
55K
55
200L
355 290 200 406 159 152.5 401 145 472 548 390 361 155.5 140 110 448 65m6 11
18.5
0.43
75K
90K
75
200L
355 290 200 406 159 152.5 401 145 472 548 390 361 155.5 140 110 448 75m6 12 7.5 20 4.5 18.5
0.52
90
225S
365 297 225 446 178
143
446 145 517 593 428 342
174
140 110 457 75m6 12 7.5 20
4
18.5
0.87
110
225S
365 297 225 446 178
143
446 145 517 593 428 342
174
170 140 487 85m6 14
4
18.5
0.95
400V class
MM-EF24 110K
9
22
4
CAUTION
· The outline dimensions are the dimensions of typical motors. The outer appearance may differ according the frame number.
· The available 200V class capacity is up to 75K.
91
IPM Motor Control
Setting procedure of IPM motor control
This inverter is set for a general-purpose motor in the initial setting. Follow the following procedure to change the setting
for the IPM motor control.
 IPM motor (MM-EFS) control setting from the operation panel (parameter setting mode)
POINT
· The parameters required to drive an IPM motor are automatically changed as a batch.
· To switch to the IPM motor control, initialize the parameter settings in the parameter setting mode or by setting
Pr.998. If parameter initialization is performed after setting other parameters, some of those parameters will be
initialized too. (Refer to the next page for the parameters initialized with this operation.)
1. Screen at power-ON
Press
Parameter
List
The monitor display appears.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
2. Parameter setting mode
to choose the parameter setting
Setting
Turn
until
0
(initial
value)
(IPM parameter
initialization) appears.
1
4. Displaying the setting
Press
"
to read the currently set value.
12
" (initial value) appears.
22, 32
5. Selecting the setting
Turn
to change it to the set value "
Explanations
of
Parameters
mode.
3. Selecting the parameter
Description
Parameter settings for
a general-purpose motor
Parameter settings for
a high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF
(rotations per minute)
Parameter settings for
a premium high-efficiency IPM motor MMEFS (rotations per minute)
For manufacturer setting (setting not
required)
".
to set.
Instructions
6. Parameter setting
Press
Features
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Display
Operation
Connection
example
· The motor capacity must be equivalent to the inverter capacity. (The 0.75K inverter can be used with the 0.4kW MM-EF.)
· Single-motor operation (one motor run by one inverter) must be performed.
· The overall wiring length with the motor must be within the specified value. (Refer to page 81)
Standard
Specifications
An IPM (interior permanent magnet) motor is a highly efficient motor compared to a general-purpose motor. Highly efficient
motor control and highly accurate motor speed control can be performed by using the inverter with an IPM motor.
· For the motor model, dedicated IPM motor (MM-EFS model or MM-EF model) must be used.
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
IPM IPM parameter initialization
Protective
Functions
Pr.998 IPM parameter initialization
IPM
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
IPM motor control, IPM parameter initialization
Options
Pr. 998, IPM
Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!!
Pr.998 Setting
0 (Initial value)
1
12
101
112
22, 32,
122, 132
Description
Parameter settings for a general-purpose motor (frequency)
Parameter settings for a high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF (rotations per minute)
Parameter settings for a premium high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS (rotations per minute)
Parameter settings for a high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF (frequency)
Parameter settings for a premium high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS (frequency)
Operation in the parameter
setting mode (
"IPM"  Write "0"
"IPM"  Write "1"
"IPM"  Write "12"
Invalid
Invalid
)
Compatibility
 Initialization can be performed by setting Pr.998 IPM parameter initialization or by choosing the mode on the operation panel.
Warranty
REMARKS
· Performing IPM parameter initialization by selecting the parameter setting mode on the operation panel automatically changes the
Pr. 998 IPM parameter initialization setting.
· The parameter initialization sets the same capacity as the inverter capacity to Pr. 80 Motor capacity. To use a 0.4kW MM-EF, set Pr. 80 Motor
capacity = "0.4" before performing IPM parameter initialization by selecting the parameter setting mode on the operation panel.
· The IPM parameter setting is displayed as "1, 12" in the parameter setting mode even if Pr.998 IPM parameter initialization = "101, 112."
IPM
motor control
Motor
P.RUN indicator is lit.
For manufacturer setting (setting not required)
92
IPM parameter initialization list
By selecting IPM motor control from the parameter setting mode or with Pr.998 IPM parameter initialization, the parameter
settings in the following table change to the settings required to drive an IPM motor. The changed settings differ according
to the IPM motor specification (capacity). Refer to the IPM motor specification list shown below.
Performing parameter clear or all parameter clear sets back the parameter settings to the settings required to drive a
general-purpose motor.
Setting
Parameter
Name
Pr.998
1
Maximum frequency
4
Multi-speed setting (high speed)
9
Electronic thermal O/L relay
13
*1
*2
*3
Starting frequency
Generalpurpose
motor
IPM motor (rotations
per minute)
IPM motor
(frequency)
0
(Initial setting)
1 (MM-EF),
12 (MM-EFS)
101 (MM-EF),
112 (MM-EFS)
1, 12
0, 101, 112
120/60Hz *3
Maximum motor rotations
per minute
Maximum motor frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
60Hz
Rated motor rotations per
minute
Rated motor frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
Rated inverter
current
0.01A/0.1A *3
0.5Hz
Minimum rotations per
minute
Minimum frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
5Hz
Minimum rotations per
minute
Minimum frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
120/60Hz *3
Maximum motor rotations
per minute
Maximum motor frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
Rated motor rotations per
minute
Rated motor frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
15
Jog frequency
18
High speed maximum frequency
20
Acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency
60Hz
22
37
Stall prevention operation level
120%
55
Frequency monitoring reference
56
Current monitoring reference
71
80
125
(903)
126
(905)
144
240
Speed display
Rated motor current
Setting increments
Short-time motor torque
0
60Hz
0.1%
0
Rated motor rotations per
minute
1
Rated motor frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
Rated inverter
current
Rated motor current
0.01A/0.1A *3
Applied motor
0
120 (when Pr.998 = "1 or 101")
210 (when Pr.998 = "12 or 112")
1
Motor capacity
9999
Inverter capacity *2
0.01kW/0.1kW *3
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
frequency
60Hz
Rated motor rotations per
minute
Rated motor frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
60Hz
Rated motor rotations per
minute
Rated motor frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
Speed setting switchover
4
Number of motor poles + 100
Soft-PWM operation selection
1
0
1
260
PWM frequency automatic
switchover
1
1
1
263
Subtraction starting frequency
Number of motor poles
1
60Hz
Rated motor rotations per
minute
Rated motor frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
266
Power failure deceleration time
switchover frequency
60Hz
Rated motor rotations per
minute
Rated motor frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
374
Overspeed detection level
9999
Maximum motor rotation per
minute  105%
Maximum motor frequency 
105%
1r/min
0.01Hz
390 *1
505
% setting reference frequency
60Hz
Rated motor frequency
0.01Hz
Speed setting reference
60Hz
Rated motor frequency
0.01Hz
557
Current average value monitor
signal output reference current
Rated inverter
current
Rated motor current
0.01A/0.1A *3
870
Speed detection hysteresis
0Hz
Speed detection hysteresis
rotations per minute
Speed detection hysteresis
frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
885
Regeneration avoidance
compensation frequency limit value
6Hz
Minimum rotations per
minute
Minimum frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
893
Energy saving monitor reference
(motor capacity)
Rated inverter
capacity
Motor capacity (Pr. 80)
0.01kW/0.1kW *3
This parameter can be set when FR-A7NL is mounted.
When Pr.80 Motor capacity  "9999," the Pr.80 Motor capacity setting is not changed by IPM parameter initialization.
Initial values and setting increments differ according to the inverter capacity. (55K or lower/75K or higher)
REMARKS
If IPM parameter initialization is performed in rotations per minute (Pr. 998 = "1" or "12"), the frequency-related parameters not
listed in the table above and the monitored items are also set and displayed in rotations per minute.
93
Specification comparison with the general-purpose motor
Item
IPM motor control
Applicable motor
Premium high-efficiency IPM
motor MM-EFS series
(the same capacity as the
inverter capacity)
Number of
connectable motors
1: 1
15kW or lower: 6 poles
18.5kW or higher: 8 poles
15kW or lower: 75Hz
Rated motor frequency
18.5kW or higher: 100Hz
Number of motor poles
High-efficiency IPM motor
MM-EF series
(the same capacity as the
inverter capacity)
General-purpose motor control
General-purpose motor SF-JR, HR
series, etc.
(the same or one-rank higher capacity
compared to the inverter)
Several motors can be driven under V/F
control.
30kW or lower: 6 poles
37kW or higher: 8 poles
30kW or lower: 90Hz
37kW or higher: 120Hz
30K or lower: 135Hz
(6P 2700r/min)
37K to 75K: 180Hz
(8P 2700r/min)
90K or higher: 160Hz
(8P 2400r/min)
Normally 2, 4, or 6 poles.
Normally 50Hz or 60Hz
Maximum output
frequency
15K or lower: 112.5Hz
(6P 2250r/min)
18K or higher: 150Hz
(8P 2250r/min)
Permissible load
120% 60s, 150% 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
(The % value is a ratio to the rated motor current.)
120% 60s, 150% 3s (inverse-time
characteristics)
(The % value is a ratio to the rated
inverter current.)
Maximum starting
torque
50%
120% (Simple magnetic flux vector
control)
Frequency
Analog
setting
input
resolution
Output
signal
Pulse
output for
meter
Carrier frequency
0.018Hz/0 to 75Hz (1500r/min)/
0.02Hz/0 to 90Hz (1800r/min)/
0.025Hz/0 to 100Hz (1500r/min)
0.03Hz/0 to 120Hz (1800r/min)
(0 to 10V / 12 bits) *1
(0 to 10V / 12 bits) *2
0.036Hz/0 to 75Hz (1500r/min)/
0.04Hz/0 to 90Hz (1800r/min)/
0.05Hz/0 to 100Hz (1500r/min)
0.06Hz/0 to 120Hz (1800r/min)
(0 to 5V / 11 bits, 0 to 20mA / 11
(0 to 5V / 11 bits, 0 to 20mA / 11
bits, 0 to 10V / 12 bits)*1
bits, 0 to 10V / 12 bits) *2
0.072Hz/0 to 75Hz (1500r/min)/
0.09Hz/0 to 90Hz (1800r/min)/
0.1Hz/0 to 100Hz (1500r/min)
0.12Hz/0 to 120Hz (1800r/min)
(0 to 5V / 11 bits) *1
(0 to 5V / 11 bits) *2
In the initial setting, 1mA is
In the initial setting, 1mA is
output at 75Hz for 15K or
output at 90Hz for 30K or
lower, and at 100Hz*1 for 18K lower, and at 120Hz*2 for 37K
or higher. The signal is output or higher. The signal is output
from across terminals FM and from across terminals FM and
SD. (SD is a common
SD. (SD is a common
terminal.)
terminal.)
The permissible frequency
The permissible frequency
load current is 2mA.
load current is 2mA.
1440 pulses/s is output at
1440 pulses/s is output at
75Hz for 15K or lower, and at 90Hz for 30K or lower, and at
100Hz*1 for 18K or higher.
120Hz*2 for 37K or higher.
55K or lower:
four patterns of 2kHz, 6kHz, 10kHz, and
14kHz
75K or higher: two patterns of 2kHz and 6kHz
400Hz (12000r/min with 4P)
(Set the upper limit frequency (Pr.1, Pr.18)
according to the motor and machine
specifications.)
0.015Hz/0 to 60Hz (1800r/min with 4P)
(0 to 10V / 12 bits)
0.03Hz/0 to 60Hz (1800r/min with 4P)
(0 to 5V / 11 bits, 0 to 20mA / 11 bits,
0 to 10V / 12 bits)
0.06Hz/0 to 60Hz (1800r/min with 4P)
(0 to 5V / 11 bits)
In the initial setting, 1mA is output at
60Hz from across terminals FM and SD.
(SD is a common terminal.)
The permissible frequency load current is
2mA.
For pulse specification, 1440 pulses/s is
output at 60Hz.
55K or lower: 0.75kHz to 14.5kHz
75K or higher: 0.75kHz to 6kHz
Connection
example
Standard
Specifications
8
120%
10Hz
(150r/min)
0.5Hz
(8r/min)
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
6
120%
7.5Hz
(150r/min)
0.5Hz
(10r/min)
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
8
120%
12Hz
(180r/min)
0.5Hz
(8r/min)
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
8
120%
12Hz
(180r/min)
0.5Hz
(8r/min)
Parameter
List
6
120%
9Hz
(180r/min)
0.5Hz
(10r/min)
Explanations
of
Parameters
Number of motor poles
Short-time motor torque
Minimum frequency
(rotations per minute)
Speed detection hysteresis
frequency (rotations per minute)
Protective
Functions
100Hz
(1500r/min)
150Hz
(2250r/min)
Options
75Hz
(1500r/min)
112.5Hz
(2250r/min)
Instructions
120Hz
(1800r/min)
160Hz
(2400r/min)
Motor
120Hz
(1800r/min)
180Hz
(2700r/min)
IPM
motor control
90Hz
(1800r/min)
135Hz
(2700r/min)
Compatibility
Rated motor frequency
(rotations per minute)
Maximum motor frequency
(rotations per minute)
Warranty
MM-EF
MM-EF
MM-EF
MM-EFS
MM-EFS
(30kW or lower) (37kW to 75kW) (90kW or higher) (15kW or lower) (18.5kW to 55kW)
Features
<IPM motor specification list>
94
Item
Automatic restart after
instantaneous power
failure
Startup delay
Driving by the
commercial power
supply
IPM motor control
General-purpose motor control
No startup waiting time.
Using the regeneration avoidance function together is
recommended.
Startup waiting time exists.
Startup delay of about 0.1s for initial tuning.
No startup delay.
Not available.
Never connect an IPM motor to the commercial power supply.
Can be driven by the commercial power
supply.
Operation during
coasting
While the motor is coasting, potential is generated across
motor terminals.
Before wiring, make sure that the motor is stopped.
While the motor is coasting, no potential
is generated across motor terminals.
Maximum motor wiring
length
100m or shorter
500m or shorter in total
*1
*2
The values differ for the 15K and lower capacity premium high-efficiency IPM motor, which requires 6 poles to run at the rated motor speed (1500r/
min), or for 18K and higher, which requires 8 poles to run at the speed.
The values differ for the 30K and lower capacity high-efficiency IPM motor, which requires 6 poles to run at the rated motor speed (1800r/min), or for
37K and higher, which requires 8 poles to run at the speed.
CAUTION
No slippage occurs with an IPM motor because of its characteristic.
If an IPM motor, which took over a general-purpose motor, is driven at the same speed as for the general-purpose motor, the running
speed of the IPM motor becomes faster by the amount of the general-purpose motor's slippage.
Adjust the speed command to run the IPM motor at the same speed as the general-purpose motor, as required.
95
Main differences and compatibilities
with the FR-F500(L) series
Plug-in option
Installation size
Features
Connection
example
Standard
Specifications
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Parameter
List
Explanations
of
Parameters
Protective
Functions
Options
Instructions
PU
Motor
Terminal block
IPM
motor control
Changed/Deleted
function
FR-F700P
Simple mode parameter
17 parameters
Pr.0 Torque boost initial value
11K to 37K: 2%, 45K, 55K: 1.5%
Pr.0 Torque boost initial value
(If the torque boost setting was being used in the initial
11K to 55K: 2%
setting in the FR-F500 series, the setting does not need
to be changed from the initial setting after the inverter is
replaced with the FR-F700P series.)
User group (16 parameters) only
User group 1 (16 parameters), User group 2 (16
Setting methods were partially changed
parameters) (Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 175)
(Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 173)
User's initial value setting (Pr.199) is deleted.
User initial value setting
Substitutable with the copy function of the operation
(Pr.199)
panel (FR-DU07)
DC injunction function with terminal is deleted.
DC injunction function with terminal (X13 signal)
Start in the reverse rotation is possible with the flying
(Setting value "8888" for Pr. 11, setting value "13" for
start function (frequency search of the automatic restart
Pr. 180 to Pr. 186)
after instantaneous power failure function)
Long wire mode
Setting is not necessary
(Setting values "10 and 11" for Pr. 240)
(Setting values "10 and 11" for Pr. 240 are deleted.)
The function is deleted.
Intelligent optimum acceleration/deceleration
For deceleration time, overvoltage fault can be avoided
(Pr.60 setting "3" and Pr. 61 to Pr. 63)
with the regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr.
885).
Automatic torque boost
The automatic torque boost is deleted because the
(Pr.38, Pr.39)
Simple magnetic flux vector (Pr.80) has been added.
The setting value "9999" is added for the PID action set
point (Pr. 133).
PID action set point (Pr. 133)
(Terminal 2 input is the set point.)
Performing the parameter clear or all parameter clear Performing the parameter clear or all parameter clear
(H5A96 or HAA99) from the DeviceNet
(H5A96 or HAA99) from the DeviceNet communication
communication option (FR-A5ND) clears the Pr. 345 option (FR-A7ND) does not clear the Pr. 345 and Pr. 346
and Pr. 346 settings.
settings.
Removable terminal block
Upward compatibility (Terminal block of the F500 can be
Removable terminal block
mounted)
FR-PU07
FR-DU07
FR-PU04, DU04
FR-DU04 unavailable (Partly restricted when the
FRPU04 is used.)
Dedicated plug-in option (not compatible)
Computer link, relay output option
Built into the inverter
FR-A5NR
(RS-485 terminal, relay output 2 points)
Three boards can be mounted
One board can be mounted
FR-F720P-0.75K, 2.2K, 3.7K, 7.5K, 18.5K, 22K, 37K, 45K,
FR-F740P-0.75K to 3.7K, 7.5K, 11K, 22K, 37K to 55K are compatible in mounting dimensions
For other capacities, an optional intercompatibility attachment (FR-AAT) is necessary.
Compatibility
FR-F500(L)
Simple mode parameter
61 parameters
Warranty
Item
96
Warranty
1. Gratis warranty period and coverage
[Gratis warranty period]
Note that an installation period of less than one year after installation in your company or your customer’s premises or a
period of less than18 months (counted from the date of production) after shipment from our company, whichever is
shorter, is selected.
[Coverage]
(1) Diagnosis of failure
As a general rule, diagnosis of failure is done on site by the customer.
However, Mitsubishi or Mitsubishi service network can perform this service for an agreed upon fee upon the
customer’s request.
There will be no charges if the cause of the breakdown is found to be the fault of Mitsubishi.
(2) Breakdown repairs
There will be a charge for breakdown repairs, exchange replacements and on site visits for the following four
conditions, otherwise there will be a charge.
1) Breakdowns due to improper storage, handling, careless accident, software or hardware design by the
customer.
2) Breakdowns due to modifications of the product without the consent of the manufacturer.
3) Breakdowns resulting from using the product outside the specified specifications of the product.
4) Breakdowns that are outside the terms of warranty.
Since the above services are limited to Japan, diagnosis of failures, etc. are not performed abroad.
If you desire the after service abroad, please register with Mitsubishi. For details, consult us in advance.
2. Exclusion of chance loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, compensation to chance losses incurred to your company or your
customers by failures of Mitsubishi products and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi
products and other services are not covered under warranty.
3. Repair period after production is discontinued
Mitsubishi shall accept product repairs for seven years after production of the product is discontinued.
4. Terms of delivery
In regard to the standard product, Mitsubishi shall deliver the standard product without application settings or
adjustments to the customer and Mitsubishi is not liable for on site adjustment or test run of the product.
97
Features
International FA Center
European FA Center
Russian FA Center
Tianjin FA Center
Guangzhou FA Center
North American FA Center
Korean FA Center
Taiwan FA Center
Standard
Specifications
Shanghai FA Center
Connection
example
Beijing FA Center
UK FA Center
German FA Center
Czech Republic FA Center
India FA Center
Thailand FA Center
ASEAN FA Center
Taiwan FA Center
SETSUYO ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
3F, No.105, Wugong 3rd Road, Wugu
District, New Taipei City 24889, Taiwan,
R.O.C.
TEL. 886-2-2299-9917
FAX. 886-2-2299-9963
Terminal Connection
Diagram
Terminal Specification
Explanation
FR Configurator
Parameter unit
operation panel
Parameter
List
Explanations
of
Parameters
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDIA PVT. LTD. German Branch
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION
India Factory Automation Centre
Gothaer Strasse 8, D-40880 Ratingen,
(CHINA) LTD. Beijing FA Center
2nd Floor, Tower A & B, Cyber Greens, DLF Germany
Unit 908, Office Tower 1, Henderson Centre, Cyber City, DLF Phase-III, Gurgaon TEL. 49-2102-486-0
18 Jianguomennei Avenue, Dongcheng
122002 Haryana, India
FAX. 49-2102-486-1120
District, Beijing, China
TEL. 91-124-463-0300
UK FA Center
TEL. 86-10-6518-8830
FAX. 91-124-463-0399
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B. V.
FAX. 86-10-6518-3907(B/S)
Thailand FA Center
UK Branch
FAX. 86-10-6518-2938(A/S)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION
Travellers Lane, Hatfield, Hertfordshire,
Tianjin FA Center
(THAILAND) CO., LTD.
AL10 8XB, U.K.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION
Bang-Chan Industrial Estate No.111 Soi
TEL. 44-1707-28-8780
(CHINA) LTD. Tianjin FA Center
Serithai 54, T.Kannayao, A.Kannayao,
FAX. 44-1707-27-8695
Room 2003 City Building, No.35, Youyi
Bangkok 10230, Thailand
Czech Republic FA Center
Road, Hexi District, Tianjin, China
TEL. 66-2906-3238
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
TEL. 86-22-2813-1015
FAX. 66-2906-3239
Czech Branch
FAX. 86-22-2813-1017
North American FA Center
Avenir Business Park, Radicka 751/113e,
Guangzhou FA Center
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION,
158 00 Praha5, Czech Republic
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION
INC.
TEL. 420-251-551-470
(CHINA) LTD. Guangzhou FA Center
500 Corporate Woods Parkway, Vernon
FAX. 420-251-551-471
Room 1609, North Tower, The Hub Center,
Hills, IL 60061 U.S.A.
Russian FA Center
No.1068, Xingang East Road, Haizhu
TEL. 1-847-478-2334
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
District, Guangzhou, China
FAX. 1-847-478-2253
Russian Branch
TEL. 86-20-8923-6730
Brazil FA Center
St.Petersburg office
FAX. 86-20-8923-6715
MELCO-TEC Representacao Comercial e Piskarevsky pr. 2, bld 2, lit "Sch", BC
Korean FA Center
Assessoria Tecnica Ltda.
"Benua", office 720; 195027, St.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION
Rua Jussara, 1750 - Bloco B- Sala 01
Petersburg, Russia
KOREA CO., LTD. (Service)
Jardim Santa Cecilia- CEP 06465-070,
TEL. 7-812-633-3497
B1F,2F, 1480-6, Gayang-Dong, GangseoBarueri, Sao Paulo, Brasil
FAX. 7-812-633-3499
Gu, Seoul, 157-200, Korea
TEL. 55-11-4689-3000
TEL. 82-2-3660-9630
FAX. 55-11-4689-3016
FAX. 82-2-3663-0475
Beijing FA Center
Protective
Functions
German FA Center
Options
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Polish Branch
32-083 Balice ul. Krakowska 50, Poland
TEL. 48-12-630-47-00
FAX. 48-12-630-47-01
Instructions
India FA Center
European FA Center
Motor
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE, LTD.
ASEAN Factory Automation Centre
307 Alexandra Road, Mitsubishi Electric
Building, Singapore 159943
TEL. 65-6470-2480
FAX. 65-6476-7439
IPM
motor control
ASEAN FA Center
Compatibility
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION
(CHINA) LTD. Shanghai FA Center
10F, Mitsubishi Electric Automation Center,
No.1386 Hongqiao Road, Changning
District, Shanghai, China
TEL. 86-21-2322-3030
FAX. 86-21-2322-3000 (9611#)
Warranty
Shanghai FA Center
Outline
Dimension
Drawings
Brazil FA Center
98
Safety Warning
To ensure proper use of the products listed in this catalog,
please be sure to read the instruction manual prior to use.
Eco Changes is the Mitsubishi Electric Group’s environmental statement, and
expresses the Group’s stance on environmental management. Through a wide range
of businesses, we are helping contribute to the realization of a sustainable society.
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
L(NA)06072ENG-A(1212)MEE
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement